JP6099162B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a sensor that detects the acceptance of a game medium at the entrance may be erroneously operated by inserting a long and narrow illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area from the gap between the main body frame and the door frame. There has been a problem that fraudulent acts such as bending the obstacle nail planted in the game area are performed. To solve this problem, there is a plate-shaped guide part that can be elastically deformed between a pair of hinge mechanisms that support the door frame so that it can be opened and closed, and a bar or the like is inserted between the door frame and the main body frame to create a gap. There has been proposed a technique in which an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted by covering a gap with an elastically deforming guide portion even if it is to be expanded (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-73340 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine does not take into account fraudulent acts such as launching a game medium attached with a wire from a storage unit into a game area in the same manner as a normal game medium.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an illegal act performed by attaching a wire to a game medium.

The present invention
Storage means capable of storing a plurality of game balls ;
A ball feeding means for sending the game ball stored in the storage means to the launch position via the passage port;
Launching means capable of firing game balls sent to the launch position by the ball feeding means one by one toward the game area;
A gaming machine comprising a tamper-proof member provided in the ball feeding means ,
The fraud prevention member is made of a bent metal plate material, and a gap is formed between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion formed by bending the metal plate material so that the wire provided on the game ball can enter. It has been
The first plate surface portion in the metal plate material is a surface portion bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and the metal plate material is attached to the ball feeding means at a portion other than the first plate surface portion in the metal plate material. Made,
The ball feeding means is formed with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the metal plate material ,
The passing port is formed with a ball non-passing portion that is communicated with a ball passing portion through which a game ball passes and through which a wire rod can enter although a game ball does not pass through,
The metal plate is arranged so that the gap is located in the non-passing part of the sphere,
Furthermore, the area of the second plate surface in the metal sheet is characterized by not larger than the area of the first plate surface.
As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an illegal act performed by attaching a wire to a game medium.
An application example of another invention disclosed separately from the present invention is shown below.
[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine,
Passing means configured to allow game media to pass through;
Lottery information acquisition means capable of acquiring information used for the lottery in response to the game medium passing through the passage means;
Using the lottery information, a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win,
Display means capable of displaying a display effect for each lottery;
An effect determining means for determining a display effect to be realized using the display means corresponding to each lottery,
Effect control means for realizing the display effect determined by the effect determination means using the display means;
With
The types of winning of the lottery by the lottery means are per 1st type, per 2nd type with different benefits for the player per 1st type, per 1st type and per 2nd type. And a third type that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of
The effect determining means, as the display effect pattern,
The first specific derivation effect for deriving whether the first specific effect is performed is a pattern for the case where the first type is won and the case where the lottery is lost. A first type effect pattern that realizes the first specific effect after one specific derivation effect and realizes an effect suggesting whether or not the first type is won after the first specific effect;
This is a pattern for the case where the lottery is lost, and, like the first type effect pattern, realizes the first specific derivation effect, but unlike the first type effect pattern, the first specific derivation After the effect, the second specific derivation effect for deriving whether or not the second specific effect is performed is realized without realizing the first specific effect, and the second specific derivation effect is realized after the second specific derivation effect. A second type effect pattern that realizes an effect suggesting that the lottery is lost by ending the effect without realizing the effect;
It is a pattern for the case of winning for each of the second type or the third type, and realizes the first specific derivation effect in the same manner as the first type effect pattern and the second type effect pattern, Although the first type effect pattern is different from the first type effect pattern, the second specific derivation effect is realized without realizing the first specific effect after the first specific derivation effect. Unlike the second type effect pattern, by realizing the second specific effect after the second specific derivation effect, an effect suggesting that the second type or the third type is won. Type 3 production pattern to be realized,
Can be determined according to the result of the lottery,
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific derivation effect is realized but the first specific effect is not realized, the most advantageous possibility of the first type disappears among the three types. However, there is still a possibility that the second specific derivation effect will be realized. Then, after the second specific derivation effect is realized, if the second specific effect is further realized, there is a possibility of per second type or per third type. Therefore, even if the first specific effect is not realized, the player can enjoy the subsequent effects while feeling the expectation of the possibility of realizing the second specific effect. Furthermore, when the second specific performance is realized, there is a possibility of both per second type and per third type having different advantages. Therefore, when the second specific effect is realized without realizing the first specific effect, the player is willing to determine whether the player has won the second type or the third type. You can proceed with the game. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine described in application example 1,
The effect determining means, as the display effect pattern,
This is a pattern for the case where the lottery is lost and, like the second type effect pattern and the third type effect pattern, realizes the first specific derivation effect, but after the first specific derivation effect Unlike the second pattern and the third type effect pattern, the first specific effect is not realized, and the second specific derivation effect is not realized and the effect is ended, so that the lottery is lost. A fourth type effect pattern that realizes an effect suggesting that it has been made can be determined according to the result of the lottery,
Gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, when the first specific derivation effect is realized but the first specific derivation effect is not realized, there is a possibility that the second specific derivation effect is not realized and the effect ends. Therefore, when the first specific effect is not realized, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the second specific derivation effect is desired, and when the second specific derivation effect is realized, It is possible to provide the player with the joy of being able to realize the second specific derivation effect! Thus, since the enjoyment obtained by observing the performance is improved, the player can progress the game more happily.

[Application Example 3]
The gaming machine according to application example 1 or 2,
From a plurality of types of gaming states including a first type gaming state in which the winning probability in the lottery is a predetermined low probability and a second type gaming state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability A game state realization means that can be realized by selecting one game state;
A granting means capable of realizing a plurality of types of the game including a first game that can grant a game medium to a player and a second game that has less game media that can be given compared to the first game. ,
With
The first type is a place where the first game is realized by the granting means,
Unlike the first type, the second type game is realized by the giving means, and the game state is realized by the game state realization means after the end of the second type game. It is a hit to be switched from the first type gaming state to the second type gaming state,
Although the second game is the same as that for the second type, the third type is different from the second type, and the game state is realized by the game state realizing means after the second game is completed. The state is about to be maintained in the first type gaming state,
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the first type is won, the player can enjoy the first game in which a relatively large number of game media can be obtained. On the other hand, if the player wins the second type, the player can obtain a high winning probability (high probability) although the player cannot enjoy the first winning game. As described above, although the benefits for the player are different between the first type and the second type, both can bring a great benefit (for example, a large amount of game media) to the player. Therefore, when the first specific effect is not realized, many game media cannot be obtained by the first game, but a high winning probability (high probability) can be obtained by realizing the second specific effect. If it can be done (if it is won by the second type), the player can finally obtain a large profit. Accordingly, the player first enjoys the effect in the hope that the first specific effect will be realized, and even if the first specific effect is not realized, the second specific effect is then performed. Expect to be realized and enjoy the production.

  The present invention can be realized in various application examples. For example, a gaming machine and a gaming machine control method, a gaming machine control method, or a computer program for realizing a gaming machine function, and the computer thereof It can be realized in the form of a recording medium on which the program is recorded.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from before. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. FIG. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front structural member of embodiment different from examples, such as FIG. 103, and was seen from the front. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. 106. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board which abbreviate | omits the rear side of a panel board. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the back. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen afterwards. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front effect unit in the center actor from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the front effect unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the table | surface production | presentation unit in a center accessory, and was seen from before. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the table | surface production | presentation unit and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the table | surface production | presentation unit in a center accessory. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the middle box production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front with the middle box, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the middle box production unit from the back with the middle box. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the middle box effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front along with the middle box. It is the exploded oblique view which decomposed | disassembled the middle box production | presentation unit and was seen from behind with the middle box. It is a front view of the back lower right production unit in a back unit. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower right production unit in a back unit from the front, (B) The perspective view which looked at the back lower right production unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower right effect unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower right effect unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower right production | presentation unit. It is a front view of a back left production unit, a back right production unit, and a back middle production unit in a back unit. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front in the state where the back left production unit in the back unit, the back right production unit, and the back middle production unit were separated, respectively. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back in the state where the back left production unit, the back right production unit, and the back middle production unit in a back unit were separated, respectively. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back left production | presentation unit, a back right production | presentation unit, and a back middle production | presentation unit. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing movement different from that in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the back left decoration body in the back left production | presentation unit of a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower direction production unit in the back unit from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower direction production unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the back lower direction production unit in a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in a back unit from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of a back lower right production unit. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back lower right effect unit following FIG. 153; FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back lower right effect unit following FIG. 154; It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle production unit. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle effect unit following FIG. 156; FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle effect unit in a state different from FIG. 156; FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle production unit following FIG. 158; It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back left decorative body in the back left effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a movement of a back lower direction production unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state where a game board faces from a game window. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the table | surface production | presentation unit in a center accessory, and a function display unit. It is a front view of the game board shown with a middle box decoration board. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 165. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 165. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 170. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a launch control input circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of the predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 185 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 185. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 188 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 188. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 191 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 191. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 192; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation switch operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation detection switch log | history creation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switch accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear with a counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, and a pair of rotation detection switch. (A) is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switch accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, (B) is accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part. It is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switch. It is explanatory drawing (range which approached the maximum value side) which shows the operation | movement of an initial value update type counter. It is explanatory drawing (range which approached the minimum value side) which shows a motion of the counter of an initial value update type. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect display schedule data update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol starting detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process. It is the schematic which shows a part of table migration table | surface TI. It is the schematic which shows a part of total fluctuation display pattern table HHT. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of a sorting table of Table A. It is explanatory drawing of a target explanatory effect. It is the schematic which shows a part of distribution table of the table C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of a target result effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of distribution table of the table D. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of distribution table of the table D. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of distribution table of the table D. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of a sorting table of table G. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of a sorting table of table G. It is the schematic which shows an example of the effect in a big hit game. It is a flow which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be implement | achieved on the display screen 1900d.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. A door frame that is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 across the center in the left-right direction (right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in a front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 through which the wiring from handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of handle attachment portion 114, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, a door frame protruding piece 110c is provided on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 so as to protrude a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having a cross section in an I-shape as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, rental unit 360, as electrical equipment, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  Although the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 is not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated with light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower central portion of the game window 101 when viewed from the front, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side, a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° -60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. The side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-like front surface as in the side inner lens 212, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the crest-like projecting portion of the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit with a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 also includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 further includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side lower decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration frame 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface, and the extending direction of the band-like lens is arranged on the front side. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  In addition, the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can make the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 have a light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in the door frame.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (axial support side) in front view and bulges forward. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish main body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 has a right side of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side, and it seems that the sense of distance is not fixed.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower dish cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the pan unit 300. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later, so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334. Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removal slider 343 that is provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and includes an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coinciding with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after drawing the remainder of the lent are returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. When the sliding gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends are opposed to each other and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401, Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, and it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation and entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51B is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the back. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 which is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body rear 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, when the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is shot. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 165) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotational drive can be stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to game ball driving defects It has to be able to bet.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right when viewed from the front end toward the front end of 542, and a second sphere inlet 542c that is disposed outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a. And a second sphere inlet 542c that communicates with the second sphere passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example uses the first ball outlet to pass the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a. From 544a, the plate unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 165) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game A notification for urging a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside is provided.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 57A is a plan view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57B is a front view of the tamper-proof member, and FIG. 57C is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which is located below the entrance port 581a and partitions the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584, and the partition portion 583a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and is on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the upper end portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (the left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the game ball I hit, and the wire Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the path of the game ball It moves along the route connecting at the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the unauthorized game ball I is pulled by the unauthorized game ball I in the cutting direction 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in a direction in which the gap is narrowed (leftward in front view). In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Accordingly, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acts.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, and the player can be entertained. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. Since the player can be less annoyed and the interest can be prevented from being reduced, and the plate unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at a substantially vertical center. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. 58, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward larger than 240. In addition, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210 a and 250 a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the ring shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to decorate the upper dish 301 with light emission. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  In the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall portion 604 is opened. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that is allowed to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate a rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. The ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not become one step by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantial game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which is inserted. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is in contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above in an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Thus, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction). Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 165) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and externally connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, as shown It is arranged to be close to the position.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  In this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted The locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front (See FIG. 108). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing illegal acts. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front side right side (open side) side of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also on the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist the same effect as the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board as viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is provided (see B. 108 to B. 115, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of the present example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails G (see FIG. 110) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is the out sphere A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2750 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2750 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2750. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2750 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is turned on to turn on a round in the “big hit” game. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 128). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, the details of which will be described later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see B 133 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the attachment boss of the front component member 1110 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 134, etc.) of the inner box 3010 or the fixing portion 3020c of the back box 3020 in the back unit 3000 that is fixedly attached to the attachment support portion 1227 In the example, it is about 2.5 mm, and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixed portion 3010c or the fixed portion 3020c from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 Can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is formed from a positioning protrusion (for example, a fixing portion 3010c or a fixing portion 3020c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the inner box 3010 or the back box 3020). A positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and is opened downward at the lower end side. A notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in a front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state of holding the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails G planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, the front unit 2000 can be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, since only the front unit is supported, it is possible to prevent the panel board 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  Further, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail G, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 are the same as the embodiment of FIGS. 103 to 105 in that the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the same. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 103 to 105, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet. It is formed in a straight line inclined so that the distance to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. It can be done.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state in which the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Next, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board with the rear side of the panel plate omitted, FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left front. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the main members constituting the game board, viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the main members constituting the game board, viewed from the diagonal rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines the outer periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven in, and a front and rear in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 A plate-like game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the direction (see FIG. 115 and the like) and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. A frame-like panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 from the front side, and the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front unit 2000 when viewed from the front. Function display unit 1180 arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized from the player side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a player behind the back unit 3000. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that can be attached and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1220 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 to be attached.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 at the lower part in the game area 1100 and directly above the out port 1151. The front side unit 2200 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 are provided. The center accessory 2500 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and a gate portion 2750 disposed adjacent to the attacker unit 2100. The center accessory 2500 includes a lower right passage member 2690 that guides the game ball flowing down along the right outer periphery to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and a shallow box-shaped inner box 3010 having an opening 3010b penetrating through the rear wall 3010a, A back box 3020 which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 through the middle box 3010 and is opened in the front side and has an opening 3020b on the rear wall 3020a on which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces, and in the middle box 3010 The attached middle box effect unit 3100, the back lower right effect unit 3200 disposed in the lower right corner of the back view 3020 when viewed from the front, the back left effect unit 3300 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020, and In the back box 3020, the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 340 in the back box 3020 In the back box 3020, the back middle stage unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3020b in the back box 3020, and the back box 3020 above the opening 3020b and behind the back middle stage unit 3500. It mainly includes a rear production unit 3700 to be arranged.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for housing a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. Yes.

  In the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, a game area 1100 is divided into left and right by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200. The outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (The inner circumference of the front component member 1110A) is a region having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game region 1100 (the front component member 1110A). The inner periphery of the center board 2500 in the game area 1100 in the area on the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 as shown in FIG. A plurality of obstacle nails G are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The game board 4 of this example is guided by the lower right passage member 2690 to be discharged to the upper right position of the attacker unit 2100 when the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the downstream side thereof. It is easy to win the start opening 2101, 2102, the big winning opening 2103, the gate portion 2750, etc. arranged on the side. When a game ball is driven to the left side of the center object 2500, it is guided to the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of obstacle nails G that are planted, or enters the warp inlet 2504 on the way to attack the player through the stage 2510. It can be released directly above the unit 2100 to win the start opening 2101, 2102, the grand prize opening 2103, the gate part 2750, etc., and enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the movement of the game ball Be able to. In other words, in the route on the right side with the center role 2500 sandwiched, the game ball moves in an orderly manner by the tunnel-like lower right passage member 2690 with almost no contact with the obstacle nail G. In the route on the left side with the object 2500 in between, you can enjoy the movement of the game ball with a feeling of dynamism by jumping with the obstacle nail G, and the player can choose the favorite route according to their preference, mood, skill, etc. It is possible to perform a game ball driving operation so as to pass through, and to prevent the game ball driving operation and movement from becoming monotonous, thereby making it difficult to get bored.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. A front side unit 2200 that is arranged on the upper left side of the gaming area 1100 and extends in an arc shape to the center in the left-right direction substantially along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100, and a gaming panel 1150 that is arranged to the right of the gaming area from the substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 to be supported, a function display unit 1180 disposed at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500, and a gate portion disposed at a position adjacent to the right side of the attacker unit 2100 in the center accessory 2500. 2750.

  As will be described in detail later, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a first start port 2101 in which game balls can be received at all times, and a gate portion in the center unit 2500 disposed below the first start port 2101. A second start port 2102 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through 2750; And a special winning opening 2103 that can receive game balls in accordance with a special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2102.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, as will be described in detail later, is a pair of general prizes in which a general prize opening 2201 that opens toward the right side and a general prize slot 2201 that opens toward the left side are arranged in the back direction. Two openings 2201 are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and four general winning openings 2201 are provided in total. Further, the front side unit 2200 has a shelf 2202 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the upper side of the front side unit 2200, and a pair of general winning ports 2201 arranged in the back direction. A shelf 2203 that is formed on the upper side and that lowers the right side of the front view and guides the abutted game ball to the right is provided.

  The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. In the center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position of the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing into the game area 1100 and returning to the game area 1100. The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged immediately above the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls recirculated from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 have a high probability and the first start port 2101 and the second start of the attacker unit 2100. It can be received in the mouth 2102 and the special prize opening 2103.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 receives a game ball flowing down along the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 at the lower right side of the stage 2510 and guides it to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100. A member 2690 and a table effect unit 2700 arranged below the lower right passage member 2690 and capable of performing an effect that a player can participate in according to the gaming state are provided. A function display unit 1180 is arranged on the lower front surface of the table effect unit 2700 in the center accessory 2500. Further, a gate portion 2750 is arranged on the right side of the front effect unit 2700 so that a game ball guided by the lower right passage member 2690 can pass through the gate portion 2750 with a high probability.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119A is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 119B is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2101 disposed at the uppermost position in the approximate center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below (directly below) the first start port 2101, and the second start port 2102, a rectangular prize-winning port 2103 that is arranged on the lower side (directly below) 2102 and extends greatly in the left-right direction than the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 disposed below the first starting port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 is pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the second starting port is opened by rotating the upper end side away from each other. The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second start port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about a substantially lower side. In a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed so that a game ball cannot be received, and the upper side is directed forward. When it is rotated so as to move, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the width in the left-right direction of the first start port 2101 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in an open state, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the game ball. As a result, in a state where each of the winning ports 2101, 2102 and 2103 can be received, the lower winning port can receive game balls more easily.

  More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200, and has a first start port 2101 and a big prize opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second starting port 2102 and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first starting port 2101 in the base plate 2110 and pivotally supported. A central receiving member 2111 that forms two starting ports 2102 and that is open on the upper and rear sides.

  The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106. An attacker driving unit 2120 is provided.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and passes through the game ball at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a collar 2110b that extends backward from the position where the first start port 2101 is formed and can guide the game ball.

  The central receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 has a light-transmitting decoration on the front surface, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right sides of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110 are not shown. A pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the width are provided, and the movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and a rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121. A start opening driving mechanism base 2123 attached to the opening, an opening / closing member 2106 for closing / opening the prize winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 for supporting the opening / closing operation, and an opening / closing member 2106 pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123, and a game ball received at the second start port 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second start port sensor 2127 to detect, And a, a count sensor 2128 for detecting the game balls that are received in winning opening 2103 is supported at a position different from the start hole sensor 2127.

  The attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 is supported on the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and connects the start port solenoid 2121, the attack solenoid 2124, the second start port sensor 2127, and the count sensor 2128 with the main control board 4100. Are provided with an attacker unit relay board 2130 (see FIG. 120) and a big prize opening decoration board 2131 supported on the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof. The attacker unit 2100 of the present example can decorate the inside of the special winning opening 2103 by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the special winning opening decoration board 2131.

  Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in a protruding direction by a coil spring. The second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so as to protrude forward at the rear position. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. The first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b to the rear, and the gaming ball that is formed below the portion that supports the starting port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second starting port 2102 is guided downward. A second guiding portion (detailed illustration is omitted).

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start-port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example is in a state where the first start port 2101 can always accept a game ball. On the other hand, in the second start opening 2102, a start ball solenoid 2121 is energized and driven in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2750 in a center role 2500 to be described later. The movable piece 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize) (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern to be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

  In this attacker unit 2100, a game ball received in the first start port 2101 is received by a ball guide passage member 3163 in the middle box effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later and detected by the first start port sensor 3102. Later, it is discharged downward.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starter port 2102 is detected by the second starter port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged as close to the opening / closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[2-3. Front side unit]
Next, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 121A is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to contact.

  The front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 as shown in the figure, and a pair of back side units arranged in the back and right direction near the middle and right ends. Are provided with respective general winning ports 2201. In addition, the front side unit 2200 is provided with shelf portions 2202 and 2203 that are inclined so that the right side is lowered above the left end and the pair of general winning holes 2201, respectively. It can be guided in the direction.

  The front side unit 2200 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200 and is inserted into the corresponding opening 1215, and is attached to the left end of the front surface of the base member 2210 and is further forward than the panel plate 1210. And a left end member 2211 having a shelf 2202 on the upper surface and having a substantially triangular front view, and attached to the front surface of the base member 2210 and projecting further forward than the panel plate 1210, and a pair of general winning ports 2201 and A receiving member 2212 having a shelf 2203, and a front decoration member 2213 having a wall portion 2213 a that connects the front ends of the receiving member 2212 and the left end member 2211 to each other and extends along the outer periphery of the game area 1100. .

  The base member 2210 of the front side unit 2200 is formed in a light-transmitting manner and is formed in a frame shape, and includes a flange portion 2210a that guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 rearward. . The front side unit 2200 includes a translucent lens member 2214 that is inserted into the frame of the base member 2210 and has a plurality of circular decorations.

  In the front side unit 2200, the front decoration member 2213, the lens member 2214, and the like have translucency. It has come to be.

  In addition, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 and guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the flange portion 2210a is a lower left member in the front decorative member 3110 of the middle box effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After being sent to the through-hole 3112a of the 3112, it is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3101 through the general discharge passage 3112b formed on the rear surface of the lower left member 3112.

[2-4. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. FIG. 122 is a front view of the center character, FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the center combination as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the center function as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each main structure. FIG. 127A is a perspective view of the center effect unit in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127B is a perspective view of the front effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the center effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the table effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front effect unit in the center combination.

  The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. 110 and the like, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, a liquid crystal display device 1900 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100 is visible. The large window portion 2501 is provided.

  The center accessory 2500 has a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501 and bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 to the inside of the game area 1100 with the approximate center in the left-right direction as a boundary. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the game ball flowing down to the left and right and preventing the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a warp inlet 2504 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the panel board 1210 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter (see FIG. 113). And a warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for discharging and refluxing.

  The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is supplied with a game ball released from the warp outlet 2505, a game ball is supplied from the first stage 2511, and can be returned to and released into the game area 1100. The second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 that is arranged across the second stage 2512 and the first stage 2511 and into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 are released and the second A chance outlet 2514 opened below the stage 2512 and immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. Although the chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 of this example is not shown in detail, the plan view has a substantially circular shape, and is arranged so as to lie half on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. ing.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is higher, and is generally smooth and flat W-shaped It is formed in a wavy shape. The first stage 2511 is arranged in a heightened portion in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is formed with a shallow groove-like chance guiding portion 2511a formed so as to become lower toward the front (chance entrance 2513), and a chance guidance. The first stage 2511 on the left and right sides of the part 2511a is disposed at the lowest position, and the first guide part 2511b that becomes lower toward the front and spreads in a fan shape to the left and right, the first guide part 2511b, and the chance guide part 2511a A first projecting portion 2511c projecting upward from the front end of the removed first stage 2511.

  In the first stage 2511, the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 is discharged forward from either the chance guiding part 2511a or the first guiding part 2511b. Further, although not shown, the upper surface of the first stage 2511 is inclined so that the rear end side is slightly lowered. Depending on the momentum of the supplied game balls, the game balls may get over the first projecting portion 2511c and be released to the second stage 2512. Further, the front end of the chance guiding portion 2511a is notched by the chance entrance 2513.

  In addition, the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 is disposed on the front side of the first stage 2511 and is generally formed lower than the first stage 2511 so that the horizontal center in the gaming area 1100 is lowest. It is formed in a curved shape. The second stage 2512 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and becomes lower toward the front and spreads in a fan shape to the left and right. And a second projecting portion 2512b projecting upward from the front end.

  In the second stage 2512, the game ball supplied from the first stage 2511 side is discharged forward (inside the game area 1100) from the second guide portion 2512a. Further, although not shown, the upper surface of the second stage 2512 is inclined so that the rear end side is slightly lowered. The second projecting portion 2512b of the second stage 2512 projects upward from the first projecting portion 2511c of the first stage 2511. However, depending on the momentum of the supplied game ball, the second projecting portion 2512b gets over the second projecting portion 2512b. May be released into the gaming area 1100. Further, the rear end of the second guiding portion 2512a is notched by the chance entrance 2513.

  In the stage 2510, the front ends of the first guide portion 2511b and the second guide portion 2512a in the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are approximately twice as wide as the diameter of the game ball. The stage 2510 has a chance entrance 2513 and a chance exit 2514 that are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and two ridges are formed in the chance exit 2514. The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 can be released into the game area 1100 in a state where the behavior of the game ball is rectified while suppressing its behavior. The first start port 2101 is accepted (wins).

  In this center accessory 2500, the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and detailed illustration is omitted, but the upper portion of the lower back effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the stage 2510. Etc. can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, the center accessory 2500 of this example has a flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 and extends rearwardly inserted into the opening portion 1215 of the panel plate 1210. A frame-like base member 2600 having an exit wall, a frame-like center front decoration unit 2620 having a peripheral wall portion 2503 and a second stage 2512 which are attached to the front surface of the base member 2600 and form a window portion 2501; A center upper decoration unit 2640 having a three-dimensional decoration inserted into the frame of the decoration unit 2620 from the rear side and attached to the upper rear side of the base member 2600, and the base member 2600 extending from the left side to the lower side in front view. Center rear decoration unit 2660 having a first stage 2511 attached to the rear side, and a base member And a, a center right decorative substrate 2680 for emitting decorated front view right side of the center before the framing unit 2620 attached to the rear side of the 600.

  The center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the base member 2600 at a position below the stage 2510 and on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can guide the game ball to the left. And a table effect unit 2700 having a function display unit 1180 that extends downward from the lower right passage member 2690 and is attached to the lower right side of the base member 2600 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and from the left end of the table effect unit 2700 to the left And a gate portion 2750 that is attached so as to protrude.

  The base member 2600 in the center accessory 2500 is a plate-shaped front surface portion 2601 that is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1210 to form a flange portion 2502, and a panel plate that extends rearward from the rear surface of the front surface portion 2601. A rear extension 2602 inserted into the opening 1215 of 1210, and a through hole 2603 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the left side of the front part 2601 and allows a game ball to pass therethrough. . The base member 2600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting the front center decorative unit 2620, the center upper decorative unit 2640, and the like.

  The center front decoration unit 2620 in the center accessory 2500 forms a window portion 2501 and a peripheral wall portion 2502, and is three-dimensionally shaped so that the front surface and the inner periphery excluding the outer periphery have a predetermined decoration. , Partially formed so as to have translucency. The center front decoration unit 2620 has a warp inlet 2504 formed on the outer periphery of the left side when viewed from the front so that a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 can be guided through the through hole 2603 of the base member 2600. It has become.

  The outer periphery of the center front decoration unit 2620 is formed such that the substantially center in the left-right direction is the highest, and the upper surface of the outer periphery is formed so as to become lower toward the left and right ends from the highest position. Specifically, the outer periphery of the upper left portion from the highest part in the center front decoration unit 2620 linearly descends once at an angle of about 45 °, and then gently descends at an angle that is linear and nearly horizontal. Further, it is formed in a zigzag shape based on a straight line that descends at an angle of about 45 ° toward the left side.

  On the other hand, a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery on the right side from the highest part in the center front decoration unit 2620 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and substantially the outer periphery of the game area 1100. It is formed in a circular arc shape along. Note that a plurality of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction are formed at predetermined intervals below the stopper portion 1114 on the outer periphery on the right side of the center front decoration unit 2620, and on the outer periphery on the right side of the center front decoration unit 2620. The speed of the game ball flowing down along can be suppressed.

  The front center decoration unit 2620 extends from the lower side of the warp inlet 2504 to the middle of the second stage 2512 along the inner periphery of the window portion 2501 (near the first guide portion 2511b on the left side when viewed from the front in the first stage 2511). And a center lower left decorative board 2621 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted (see FIG. 126). The center lower left decorative board 2621 can decorate the corresponding part with light emission.

  The center upper decoration unit 2640 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the upper part of the frame of the base member 2600 from the rear side and forms the upper side of the window portion 2501, and is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900 in front view. Although illustration is omitted, a logo indicating the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed on the front surface. The center upper decorative unit 2640 is not illustrated in detail, but the logo character is translucent and has a metal glossy plating layer on the character rim, and the center logo in a horizontally-long box shape with the rear opened. A decoration member 2641, and a center logo decoration substrate 2642 on which a plurality of LEDs arranged to close the rear end opening of the center logo decoration member 2641 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. .

  The center upper decoration unit 2640 includes an upper front decoration member 2643 which is disposed on each of the left and right sides and the upper side of the horizontally long center logo decoration member 2641 and which is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface and is shaped like a metal mesh. Arranged above the upper front decorative member 2643 disposed above the center upper decorative member 2641 and the center upper decorative substrate 2644 disposed above the upper front decorative member 2643 on the left side of the front view and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a front center decorative board 2645 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The center upper decoration unit 2640 also has a center logo decoration member 2641, an upper front decoration member 2643, and a center upper front decoration board 2645 so as to close the space between the center logo decoration member 2640 and the frame of the base member 2600 in front view. An upper rear decorative member 2646 having translucency, which is disposed on the rear side, has a relief of a geometric pattern formed on the front surface, and has an upper outer periphery formed in substantially the same shape as the upper outer periphery of the center front decorative unit 2620; An upper rear decoration board 2647 disposed on the rear side of the upper rear decoration member 2646 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  As shown in the figure, the center rear decoration unit 2660 of the center accessory 2500 extends substantially vertically downward from the left end of the center upper decoration unit 2640 in a front view, and then extends rightward from the lower end to the right of the center upper decoration unit 2640. The base member 2600 is attached to the rear side of the base member 2600. The center rear decoration unit 2660 is formed such that the inner peripheral left edge and the lower edge of the window portion 2501 are formed by a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending in the left-right direction, and a warp outlet 2505 and A first stage 2511 is provided. The center post-decoration unit 2660 is mainly formed to have a three-dimensional predetermined shape on the front side, and to be partially translucent.

  The center rear decoration unit 2660 is disposed at a position corresponding to the through hole 2603 of the base member 2600 on the left side, and has an entrance 2661 that opens forward and allows game balls to pass therethrough, and a game ball that has entered the entrance 2661 downward. A guide passage 2662 that is guided to the warp outlet 2505 and opened at the rear, and a transparent cover member that partitions the rear ends of the guide passage 2662 and the first stage 2511 and covers the upper sides of the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 2663, and a center left decorative board 2664 which is arranged behind the entrance and located on the rear side of the upper part and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The center right decorative board 2680 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and the second stage 2512 on the right side and the lower side of the center front decorative unit 2620 by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Further, it is possible to decorate the right side portion with light emission. In FIG. 126, reference numeral 2681 denotes a substrate cover that covers the lower rear surface of the center right decorative substrate 2680.

  The lower right passage member 2690 in the center accessory 2500 is formed in a shape extending in the left-right direction in a U-shaped cross-section with a size that allows a game ball to roll inside and opened on the rear side, and is a colored transparent material It is formed by. The lower right passage member 2690 has a length extending from the outer periphery on the right side of the center front decoration unit 2620 to a position corresponding to a position immediately below the right first guide portion 2511b on the first stage 2511, and the left side with respect to the horizontal is on the left side. It is attached to the front surface of the base member 2600 in an inclined state so as to be slightly lower.

  The lower right passage member 2690 includes an extending portion 2690a in which the right end in front view at the bottom of the U-shaped cross section extends further to the right than the outer periphery of the center front decoration unit 2620. The extending portion 2690a extends to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 1100, whereby the game ball flowing down between the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 is transferred to the lower right passage member. All are received by the extending portion 2690a of 2690 and enter the lower right passage member 2690.

  Note that the lower right passage member 2690 can be attached to the base member 2600 even immediately below the extending portion 2690a, so that even if a game ball falls on the extending portion 2690a, it can sufficiently withstand the impact. It has become.

  Further, the lower right passage member 2690 in the center accessory 2500 has an LED mounted on the front surface of the upper end extending to the rear side of the lower right passage member 2690 in the center lower right rear decoration board 2711 of the table effect unit 2700 described later. By emitting light, the light is decorated from the rear side. Accordingly, the lower right passage member 2690 is caused to emit light in a gaming state in which the lower right passage member 2690 is used, thereby urging the player to perform a driving operation such that a game ball flows through the lower right passage member 2690. Can be done. The LEDs on the center lower right rear decorative board 2711 arranged on the rear side of the lower right passage member 2690 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the lower right passage member 2690, and the LEDs are sequentially turned on and off. Thus, it is possible to perform a flowing light emitting decoration, and the player can be attracted to the lower right passage member 2690.

  The front effect unit 2700 in the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the base member 2600 so as to extend below the lower right passage member 2690. This front effect unit 2700 has an outer shape in front view that is substantially the same length as the lower right passage member 2690 and has an upper side that extends in parallel in the left-right direction, and substantially the same length as the upper side that is substantially perpendicular from the left end of the upper side. The hanging left side, the lower side extending from the lower end of the left side in parallel to the upper side to the right by about half the length of the upper side, and the right end of the lower side and the right side of the upper side are arcuate along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 The extended right side is generally formed in a trapezoidal shape. A gate part 2750 is attached to the left side of the table effect unit 2700 so as to extend to the left, and a gate sensor 2751 for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in the gate part 2750.

  As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, etc., the front effect unit 2700 is disposed in a circular relief formed at a substantially center in the vertical direction and at a position to the left from the center in the horizontal direction, and extends in a rectangular shape in the vertical direction and is The detection port 2701a which penetrates in the direction, is arranged on the upper side of the detection port 2701a and extends horizontally to the right and left, the open / close port 2701b which penetrates in the front-rear direction, the lower side of the open / close port 2701b and the right side of the detection port 2701a A front decorative member 2701 having a plurality of through-holes 2701c penetrating in the front-rear direction and a function display portion 2701d having a translucency disposed below the detection port 2701a and having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface; An object (for example, a player's finger) attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 2701 so as to close the detection port 2701a of the decorative member 2701 is detected. A possible object detection sensor 2702 and a lens which is attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 2701 so as to close a plurality of through holes 2701c in the front decoration member 2701 from the rear side, has translucency, and can diffuse light Member 2703.

  The front effect unit 2700 is disposed on the rear side of the object detection sensor 2702 and the lens member 2703 and is attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 2701 and has a center lower right front decoration board 2704 mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the front decorative member 2701 and mounted on the rear side of the function display portion 2701d, which is flush with the center lower right front decorative board 2704. A function display board 1191 in the mounted function display unit 1180, and a plurality of conductive holes 2705a that are arranged between the function display board 1191 and the front decorative member 2701 and extend in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LEDs of the function display board 1191 are provided. And a partition member 2705 that suppresses diffusion of light from the LED.

  Further, the front effect unit 2700 is disposed in the rear side of the center lower right front decorative board 2704 and the function display board 1191 and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the opening / closing opening 2701b in the front decorative member 2701 from the rear side. A plate-shaped opening / closing member 2706 having two support bosses 2706a extending rearward from the lower side is further provided. The two support bosses 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706 are arranged so as to extend rearward from the right end of the lower side and the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the support boss 2706a extending rearward from the substantially horizontal center is the right end. It extends to the rear longer than the support boss 2706a. (See Figure 129)

  Further, the front effect unit 2700 has a size that covers the entire rear side of the front decorative member 2701 and projects upward from the upper side of the front decorative member 2701 so as to correspond to the lower right passage member 2690, and is rearward of the opening / closing member 2706. A unit base 2707 that supports the front decoration member 2701 from the rear side and is attached to the base member 2600 is provided. The unit base 2707 is formed in a position corresponding to the rear side of the lower right passage member 2690, has a horizontally long rectangular shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of rows of through holes 2707a along the lower right passage member 2690; An opening 2707b formed in a position corresponding to the opening / closing opening 2701b in the decorative member 2701 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and two support bosses 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706 can be passed through and can be guided, respectively. Part 2707c. As shown in the figure, the two guide portions 2707c of the unit base 2707 are bent in a generally U shape, and are further extended obliquely to the lower left from the left end extending in the left-right direction parallel to the upper side of the table effect unit 2700. Is formed.

  Further, the front effect unit 2700 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2707 so as to close the opening 2707b of the unit base 2707, and has a light-transmitting thin plate-like sheet member 2708, and a support boss 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706. A roller bush 2709 that is rotatably inserted and is capable of rolling within the guide portion 2707c of the unit base 2707, and a support boss 2706a that is attached to the rear end of the support boss 2706a on the right side of the opening / closing member 2706 is mounted on the unit base. And a washer 2710 for preventing the 2707 from coming out of the guide portion 2707c.

  The front effect unit 2700 also includes a center lower right rear decorative board 2711 that is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 2707b in the unit base 2707, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2707, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. This center lower right rear decorative board 2711 is arranged on the rear side of the lower right passage member 2690 and arranged in the left and right direction, three 7 segment LEDs 2711b facing from the opening 2707b of the unit base 2707, and the 7 segment LEDs 2711b. And two LEDs 2711c arranged between the two. In the center lower right rear decorative board 2711, two LEDs 2711c arranged between the left side and the middle of the three 7-segment LEDs 2711b are arranged in the vertical direction, and the numbers displayed by the 7-segment LEDs 2711b are "Colon" is formed. That is, the time can be displayed by three 7-segment LEDs 2711b and two LEDs 2711c.

  Further, the front effect unit 2700 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2707 so as to cover the lower rear side of the unit base 2707 on the rear side of the center lower right rear decorative board 2711, and is a shallow box-like rear side opened. A cover 2712, a front effect drive motor 2713 attached to the rear side of the rear cover 2712 and having a rotation shaft 2713a extending forward of the rear cover 2712; and a unit base 2707 fixed to the rotation shaft 2713a of the front effect drive motor 2713. A drive gear 2714 disposed between the rear cover 2712, a driven gear 2715a meshing with the drive gear 2714, a detection piece 2715b that rotates integrally with the driven gear 2715a and extends outward in the radial direction, and a detection piece 2715b Are extended pieces 2715c extended from the different positions on the outer circumference in the radial direction and extended pieces 2 15c is provided at the front end side of 15c and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the radial direction. The opening / closing member 2706 has a long hole 2715d in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and is slidably inserted. , And an opening / closing detection sensor 2716 that can detect the detection piece 2715b of the drive transmission member 2715 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2707.

  The drive transmission member 2715 of the front effect unit 2700 is disposed near the lower end of the guide portion 2707c between the two guide portions 2707c arranged on the left and right sides of the unit base 2707, and is a rectangular shape of the guide portion 2707c on the left side when viewed from the front. The rotation axis is arranged on a dividing line that bisects the inner angle bent in a shape (see FIG. 130). The drive transmission member 2715 has a length of the extended piece 2715c extending to the outer peripheral side of the bent portion of the guide portion 2707c, and a long hole 2715d formed at the tip of the extended piece 2715c. The extended piece 2715c has a length applied to the guide portion 2707c at any position within the rotation angle range of the drive transmission member 2715 applied to the guide portion 2707c. Accordingly, when the drive transmission member 2715 is rotated in a state where the guide portion 2707c is penetrated from the front side and the support boss 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706 is inserted into the long hole 2715d, the support boss 2706a slides in the long hole 2715d. At the same time, the guiding portion 2707c can be slid. In this example, the rotation angle range of the drive transmission member 2715 is about 110 °.

  Next, the operation in the front effect unit 2700 will be described. The front carry-out unit 2700 is formed in a shape imitating a fingerprint authentication system, and the inside of a circular relief arranged substantially at the center of the front decorative member 2701 imitates a fingerprint authentication unit, and an upper opening / closing port 2701b. An opening / closing member 2706 that closes the door imitates a door that opens and closes according to the result of authentication. The front effect unit 2700 is in a state in which a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing opening 2701b of the front decoration member 2701 is closed by an opening / closing member 2706 in a normal state, and a decoration (illustration is shown) applied to the front surface of the opening / closing member 2706 is shown. (Omitted) is visible from the player side, and the 7-segment LED 2711b of the center lower right rear decorative board 2711 arranged on the rear side is not visible from the player side.

  Then, according to the game state that changes by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 will be described in detail. Accordingly, when an effect image that prompts the player to perform fingerprint authentication by the front effect unit 2700 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the object detection sensor 2702 can detect an object for a predetermined time. . When the object detection sensor 2702 is in a detectable state, if a player places a finger on the front surface of the detection opening 2701a of the front decoration member 2701 for a predetermined time or more, the opening / closing member 2706 is moved to open the opening / closing opening 2701b, and the rear side The player can visually recognize the display by the 7-segment LED arranged in the. The display by the 7 segment LED is, for example, the time until the special lottery result is displayed, the time until the big hit game is started, the degree of possibility (reliability) for the contents of the lottery special lottery result, etc. Is displayed, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In a normal state, the opening / closing member 2706 is movable in the front effect unit 2700 at a position where the opening / closing member 2706 closes the opening / closing port 2701b of the front decorative member 2701. In this closed position, the opening / closing member 2706 is moved. The two support bosses 2706a are positioned on one end side of the guide portion 2707c bent in a square shape (see FIG. 130 (a)). When the opening / closing member 2706 is in the closed position, the detection piece 2715c of the drive transmission member 2715 is detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 2716.

  When the front effect drive motor 2713 is driven to rotate counterclockwise in the rear view with the opening / closing member 2706 in the closed position, the drive gear 2714 fixed to the rotation shaft 2713a of the front effect drive motor 2713 and the meshing driven gear 2715a. As a result, the drive transmission member 2715 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As the drive transmission member 2715 rotates, the elongated hole 2715d formed at the tip of the extending piece 2715c moves relatively to the right in the rear view, and therefore the elongated hole 2715d moves in the elongated hole 2715d. The support boss 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706 inserted into the right side is pushed rightward in the rear view.

  Since the support boss 2706a of the opening / closing member 2706 is inserted into the guide portion 2707c of the unit base 2707, it slides in the elongated hole 2715d of the drive transmission member 2715 and simultaneously slides in the guide portion 2707c. The entire 2706 moves to the other end side of the guide portion 2707c along the shape of the guide portion 2707c (see FIG. 130 (b)). That is, since the guide portion 2707c of the unit base 2707 is formed in a bent shape as described above, the opening / closing member 2706 is moved so as to slide in the direction in which the opening / closing member 2706 extends from the closed position. It slides diagonally downward and moves to the open position.

  When the opening / closing member 2706 moves to the open position, the opening / closing opening 2701b of the front decoration member 2701 is opened, and the 7-segment LED 2711b and LED 2711c of the center lower right rear decoration board 2711 arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing opening 2701b are players. It becomes visible from the side.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 2706 is moved from the open position to the closed position, the opening / closing member 2706 can be returned to the closed position by rotating the front effect drive motor 2713 in the opposite direction. At this time, the guide portion 2707c of the unit base 2707 has an obtuse angle at the side where the rotational axis of the drive transmission member 2715 is disposed, that is, the guide portion 2707c extends obliquely in the vertical direction. Since the part is inclined so as to approach the rotation center side of the drive transmission member 2715 toward the upper side, a pushing force is applied to the support boss 2706a on the center side in the left-right direction by the long hole 2715d of the drive transmission member 2715. As a result, the support boss 2706a on the center side in the left-right direction rises, and at the same time, a force that moves to the left in the rear view along the guide portion 2707c acts. The support boss 2706a on the left side in the rear view of the opening / closing member 2706 is moved in the direction of climbing the part extending obliquely upward of the guide portion 2707c by the force in the left direction in the rear view acting from the support boss 2706a on the center side. Thus, the opening / closing member 2706 can smoothly translate and return to the closed position.

  In the table effect unit 2700 of this example, a function display unit 2701d that is the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is disposed below the detection opening 2701a of the front decoration member 2701. Similar to the above, the function display unit 1180 of this example is a gaming state indicator 1183 comprising one LED for displaying a gaming state that is changed by a game ball that is driven into the gaming area 1100 at the left end when viewed from the front. And a first special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2101 and the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2101. The second special lottery result drawn by the first special symbol display 1185 including eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result as the first special symbol and the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2102 The second special symbol display 1186 comprising eight LEDs for displaying the symbol as the second special symbol, and the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 comprising two LEDs A second special symbol memory indicator 1187 for indicating the number of holding about, and a.

  In addition, the function display unit 1180 is selected by a normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2750 by the game ball and the game ball passing through the gate unit 2750. The normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying the normal lottery result as a normal symbol, and the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”. A round indicator 1190 including two LEDs for displaying the number of times (number of rounds).

  Since the function display unit 1180 of this example is disposed below the detection port 2701a of the front decorative member 2701, when the player touches the detection port 2701a, the display of the function display unit 1180 is performed by the player's hand. The part 1181 (function display part 2701d) is difficult to see. This makes it difficult to recognize the special lottery result displayed on the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, etc. of the function display unit 1180, so that the special lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to avoid knowing the contents of the special lottery result before being suggested, and the entertainment for suggesting the special lottery result performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 etc. is enjoyed to the end, and there is an interest in the game It can control that it falls.

  The gate portion 2750 of the center accessory 2500 protrudes from the left side of the front effect unit 2700 when viewed from the front and is disposed at the approximate center in the vertical direction so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. A gate sensor 2751 is disposed in the gate portion 2750 so that a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2750 can be detected.

  The center accessory 2500 has a shape in which the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view is substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In a state where the game panel 1200 is attached to the panel plate 1210, there is a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the upper part of the center accessory 2500 to the right side along the outer periphery of the center front decoration unit 2620 to the lower right passage member 2690. By making a right stroke, a game ball can be easily driven through the lower right passage member 2690 to the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 and the gate portion 2750. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 between the inner periphery of the game region 1100. .

[2-5. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. 131 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit and the rear unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit as the main component and from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 3000 of this example is a shallow box-shaped middle box that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), has a front side opened, and has a large opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 3010a. 3010, a back box 3020 which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 via the inner box 3010 and has a front shape opened, and an opening 3020b facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3020a. The middle box effect unit 3100 attached to the inner box 3010, the lower right effect unit 3200 arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the back box 3020, and the back left arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020. Production unit 3300 and back right production unit 3400, and back left production unit 3300 and back right production unit in back box 3020 The back middle production unit 3500 that moves up and down by 400, the back lower production unit 3600 disposed below the opening 3020b in the back box 3020, the rear side of the rear middle production unit 3500 above the opening 3020b in the back box 3020 And a back effect unit 3700 arranged in the main.

  The back middle production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 has a left end extending in the left-right direction so that the support pin 3307a of the back left lifting slider 3307 in the back left production unit 3300 can be rotated via a roller bushing 3504 and slidable in the left-right direction. While being supported, the right end side is rotatably supported by a support pin 3407a of a back right elevating slider 3407 in the back right rendering unit 3400 via a roller bushing 3504.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower left corner of the back box 3020 when viewed from the front, and a blower 3030 for ventilating the inside of the back box 3020, and a back surface of the back wall 3020a of the back box 3020 on the lower side of the opening 3020b A panel relay board 3040 attached near the left end of the view, a lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3020a in the back box 3020 on the right side of the back face of the panel relay board 3040, and a back box on the right side of the lamp drive board 3041 A motor drive board 3042 attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3020a in 3020; a board cover 3043 which covers the rear faces of the motor drive board 3042 and the lamp drive board 3041 and is attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3020a in the back box 3020; 30 at the rear surface of the rear wall 3020a at An upper relay terminal plate 3044 mounted to the upper = 0b, and a.

  The panel relay board 3040 in the back unit 3000 includes a connection between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, a general winning port sensor 3101, a count sensor 2128, a gate sensor 2751 provided in the main control board 4100 and the game board 4. This relay relays the connection with the start port solenoid 2121, the attack solenoid 2124, the magnetic detection sensor 3103, and the like.

  The lamp driving board 3041 in the back unit 3000 is based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, and 430 provided on the door frame 5. , 432, etc., and the decorative boards 2131, 2621, 6422, 2644, 2645, 2647, 2664, 2680, 2704, 2711, 3140, 3164, 3310, 3311, 3410, 3518, 3609, 3703 provided on the game board 4 It is for controlling the light emission of LED mounted in the above.

  Further, the motor drive board 3402 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and each drive motor provided in the game board 4 2713, 3204, 3232, 3303, 3312, 3403, 3514, 3555, 3605 and the like are controlled.

  Further, the upper relay terminal plate 3044 in the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3041 and a motor drive board 3042, a back left lift drive motor 3303, a back left lift position detection sensor 3309, and a back right play unit 3400. Back right up / down drive motor 3403, back right up / down position detection sensor 3409, back inside rotation drive motor 3514 of back inside production unit 3500, rotation position detection sensor 3516, back inside decoration board 3518, rotation lamp drive motor 3555, back This is for relaying the connection with the back decorative board 3703 of the upper effect unit 3700.

  The middle box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a shallow box shape with the front side opened, and a large opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3010a. Further, the inner box 3010 is formed with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end, and this fixing portion 3010c is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220). ing. Further, the inner box 3010 has mounting holes and mounting bosses formed at appropriate positions for mounting the inner box effect unit 3100, the back box 3020, and the like. In this example, the inner box 3010 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The back box 3020 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front side opened, and a substantially rectangular opening 3020b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3020a. The opening 3020 b of the back box 3020 is formed to be smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, the back box 3020 is formed with a fixing portion 3020c for mounting and fixing to the rear side of the middle box 3010 on the outer periphery of the front end. Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3020 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the production units 3200, 3300, 3400, 3600, 3700, boards, and the like. .

  Further, the back box 3020 has a fixed frame 3020d extending rearward in a plate frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the opening 3020b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3020a in a rectangular shape with the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900; A fixing hole 3020e formed on the right side of the fixed frame 3020d when viewed from the back and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the fixing hole 3020e are formed on the opposite side (left side when viewed from the back) of the fixed frame 3020d. A lock mechanism attachment portion 3020f to which the lock mechanism 3050 is attached. The back box 3020 is configured such that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame 3020d from the rear side, and the rear surface in the fixed frame 3020d of the rear wall 3020a is a flat surface. The front surface of 1900 comes into contact.

  Further, the back box 3020 is formed with a vent hole 3020g that penetrates and opens in a rectangular shape near the lower end of the outer peripheral wall on the left side when viewed from the front and the left end of the outer peripheral wall on the upper side. Blowers 3030 and 3710 face the exhaust ports 3020g on the inner side, and the blowers 3030 and 3710 can ventilate the air in the back box 3020 through the vents 3020g to the outside. It is like that.

  The blower 3030 in the back unit 3000 has a fan (sirocco fan) arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the front-rear direction inside, and an intake port 3030 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed near the rotation center. An exhaust port 3030b is formed on the outer periphery, and the exhaust port 3030b is attached in the back box 3020 so as to face the vent 3020g formed at the lower left end of the outer peripheral wall of the back box 3020. Thereby, the air in the back box 3020 can be discharged outside the back box 3020 through the vent 3020g, and the temperature inside the back box 3020 can be suppressed from rising.

  The back unit 3000 includes a lock mechanism 3050 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3020a in the back box 3020. The lock mechanism 3050 of this example includes a lock main body 3051 attached to the lock mechanism attaching portion 3020f of the back box 3020 and having an insertion port into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side, and the rear of the lock main body 3051. And a lock slider 3052 that is attached to the side so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and that can be opened and closed by sliding.

[2-6. Middle box production unit]
Next, the inner box effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. 136 (A) is a perspective view of the middle box effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front with the middle box, and FIG. 136 (B) is a perspective view of the middle box effect unit as seen from the rear with the middle box. Further, FIG. 137 is an exploded oblique view of the rear box with the middle box rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front along with the middle box, and FIG. 138 is an exploded oblique view of the middle box rendering unit viewed from the rear along with the middle box. FIG.

  The middle box production unit 3100 in this example is supported by a shallow box-shaped middle box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200, and the overall shape in front view is along the box frame of the middle box 3010. It is substantially C-shaped. The middle box effect unit 3100 is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and mainly the rear side of the area where the obstacle nail G is planted in the game area 1100. It is decorated.

  The middle box effect unit 3100 has a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and a main decoration portion 3110a which are arranged in a three-dimensional shape and arranged in a concentric circle shape (concentric octagonal shape) centered on the approximate center of the game area 1100 in front view. A colorless and transparent front decorative member 3110 having a sub decorative portion 3110b formed with a predetermined width between them, and a plate shape formed along the rear surface shape of the front decorative member 3110 and provided with a predetermined pattern decoration on the front surface Decorative sheet 3120, a diffusion member 3130 disposed behind the decoration sheet 3120 and capable of diffusing light, and an inner box decoration substrate 3140 disposed behind the diffusion member 3130 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And the main decorative portion 3110a and the sub decorative portion 3110b of the front decorative member 3110 disposed between the inner box decorative substrate 3140 and the diffusion member 3130. Includes a grid-like shielding member 3150 partitioned into correspondingly, the.

  The front decoration member 3110 in the middle box effect unit 3100 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and the decoration sheet 3120, the diffusion member 3130, the shielding member 3150, and the like are accommodated inside the rear side, and the rear end is It is closed by an inner box decorative substrate 3140. The main decorative portion 3110a (shaded portion in FIG. 164) of the front decorative member 3110 has a quadrangular shape extending along a substantially concentric octagonal side centered on the approximate center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. It is a flat surface that protrudes forward from the auxiliary decoration portion 3110b and is inclined in the front-rear direction so that the side close to the center of the game area 1100 in the front view is retracted rearward.

  Further, the sub-decoration portion 3110b (shaded portion in FIG. 164) having a substantially constant width in the front decoration member 3110 has a front surface that is a flat surface, and a portion that extends radially about the center of the game area 1100 in a front view. And a belt-like lens having a small width extending in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of each part. Thereby, in the front decoration member 3110, the rear side of the sub decoration part 3110b is difficult to recognize. In addition, the belt-like lens on the rear surface of the sub-decorating portion 3110b is formed with priority given to a portion extending radially rather than a portion along the circumferential direction.

  The front decorative member 3110 is arranged at the lower rear side in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, on the rear side of the attacker unit 2100, and on the left end of the lower member 3111 and behind the lower left corner in the game area 1100. A left lower member 3112 disposed on the left side, a left member 3113 disposed on the left rear side of the center accessory 2500 on the left rear side of the center in the vertical direction in the game area 1100 in contact with the upper end of the lower left member 3112, and the left member 3113 An upper left member 3114 disposed on the rear side of the upper left corner of the gaming area 1100 in contact with the upper end of the game area 1100; an upper member 3115 disposed on the upper rear side in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100 in contact with the right end of the upper left member 3114; It has. The front decoration member 3110 is divided by five members 3111, 3112, 3113, 3114 and 3115 so as to correspond to the five sides of the octagonal shape, and each is attached to the inner box 3010.

  The lower left member 3112 in the front decorative member 3110 is located on the rear side of the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000, and the game ball can pass to positions corresponding to the flanges 2210a of the base member 2210 in the front side unit 2200. A through-hole 3112a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed. In addition, the lower left member 3112 is formed with two general discharge passages 3112b that open the rear side and guide the game ball that has passed through the through hole 3112a downward. These general discharge passages 3112b are formed so as to collect the game balls received in a pair of general winning ports 2201 arranged in the back direction in the front side unit 2200 and discharge them downward, and the opened rear side is plate-shaped. The passage cover 3160 is closed. A general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball is attached to a position corresponding to the lower end of each general discharge passage 3112b in the passage cover 3160, and the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 are attached. Can be detected.

  In addition, the decorative sheet 3120 in the middle box effect unit 3100 is formed in a shape that follows the rear surface of the front decorative member 3110 after a predetermined pattern is printed on the surface of the plate material in translucent milky white. It is. Similar to the front decorative member 3110, the decorative sheet 3120 is divided into five parts so as to correspond to the five sides of the octagonal shape. The lower sheet 3121, the lower left sheet 3122, the left sheet 3123, the upper left sheet 3124, and the upper sheet The sheet 3125 is configured. Note that the lower left sheet 3122 has a size corresponding to only a portion of the front decorative member 3110 where the main decorative portion 3110a and the sub decorative portion 3110b of the lower left member 3112 are formed, and a portion where the general discharge passage 3112b and the like are formed. Is not placed on the back side of

  Further, the diffusing member 3130 in the inner box extending unit 3100 has a front view shape that is substantially the same size as the decorative sheet 3120, and the front surface is a flat surface that is substantially parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200. The part corresponding to the sub decoration part 3110b is formed in a shape recessed backwards with respect to the part corresponding to the main decoration part 3110a in the decoration member 3110. Similar to the front decorative member 3110, the diffusing member 3130 is provided with a band-shaped prism having a small width extending in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction on the rear surface corresponding to the sub decorative portion 3110b.

  Similarly to the front decorative member 3110, the diffusion member 3130 is divided into five parts corresponding to the five sides of the octagonal shape, and includes a lower member 3131, a lower left member 3132, a left member 3133, an upper left member 3134, The upper member 3135 is configured. The upper member 3135 of the diffusing member 3130 has a size corresponding to only the main decorative portion 3110a on the inner peripheral side and the sub decorative portion 3110b on the outer side of the front decorative member 3110.

  Further, the middle box decoration board 3140 in the middle box production unit 3100 has LEDs mounted on the front decoration member 3110 at positions corresponding to the main decoration parts 3110a and the sub decoration parts 3110b, respectively. The sub-decoration portions 3110b can be independently decorated for light emission. The inner box decorative substrate 3140 is divided into three along the circumferential direction of the octagon, and extends to the uppermost sub decorative portion 3110b extending radially in the lower member 3111 in the front decorative member 3110 and the lower left member 3112. The lower decorative board 3141 disposed on the rear side, the remainder of the lower left member 3112 in the front decorative member 3110, and the rear side of the left member 3113 and the upper left member 3114 extending radially below the uppermost sub decorative part 3110b. Left decorative board 3142, the upper left decorative board 3143 disposed on the lower rear side of the upper main decorative part 3110 a of the upper member 3115 and the remaining upper left member 3114 of the front decorative member 3110, and the front decorative member 3110. An upper front decorative substrate 3144 disposed on the rear side of the upper main decorative portion 3110a in the upper member 3115; Thus it is constructed.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower decorative board 3141 in the inner box decorative board 3140 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the front side unit 2200 so that the front side unit 2200 can be decorated with light emission. It has become.

  Further, the shielding member 3150 in the middle box effect unit 3100 has a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a size corresponding to each main decoration part 3110a in the front decoration member 3110, and a part corresponding to each sub decoration part 3110b. A plurality of through-holes are formed so that only the LEDs mounted on the inner box decorative substrate 3140 disposed on the rear side face. This shielding member 3150 can block the light from the LED corresponding to the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b from irradiating the other main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b. Further, the shielding member 3150 is divided into five parts similarly to the front decoration member 3110, and includes a lower member 3151, a lower left member 3152, a left member 3153, an upper left member 3154, and an upper member 3155.

  Further, the middle box effect unit 3100 includes a right upper decoration member 3161 attached to the front upper right corner of the middle box 3010, a lower decoration member 3162 attached to the upper right of the lower member 3111 in the front decoration member 3110, and a middle box decoration substrate 3140. The ball guide passage member which is attached to the lower center of the middle box 3010 at the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 3141 and which is received at the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and is guided and released downward. 3163, and a starter decoration board 3164 attached to the rear surface of the middle box 3010 and directly behind the first starter port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The ball guide passage member 3163 in the middle box effect unit 3100 is configured such that the opened rear side is closed by the rear wall 3010a of the middle box 3010. The ball guide passage member 3163 is provided with a first start port sensor 3102 capable of detecting a game ball flowing through the inside, and the game ball received in the first start port 2101 is received. It can be detected.

  The middle box effect unit 3100 further includes a magnetic detection sensor 3103 that is attached to the lower member 3151 of the shielding member 3150 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and can detect magnetism. Yes. The magnetic detection sensor 3103 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraud using a magnet or the like.

  The middle box effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment constitutes a back side background that can be seen from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210) in the gaming area 1100, and a predetermined pattern decoration is printed thereon. Compared to a conventional pachinko machine with a board seal attached to the front of the gaming panel 1200, the background is slightly away from the player, so that it can provide a deep background without a sense of pressure, and is three-dimensionally shaped. Since the main decoration portion 3110a is provided, the appearance can be changed depending on the position of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a new atmosphere different from the conventional pachinko machines can be provided.

  Further, the middle box effect unit 3100 can arrange a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a on the front decoration member 3110 in a concentric octagonal shape and radiate, and each of them can be decorated with light emission independently by the middle box decoration substrate 3140. Therefore, for example, a variety of light-emitting effects such as a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting part circulates, a light-emitting effect that moves radially, and a light-emitting effect that follows a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 are provided in the game area 1100. It can be performed on the back side, so that the player can be more entertained.

[2-7. Bottom right production unit]
Subsequently, the back lower right effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. FIG. 139 is a front view of the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 140 (A) is a perspective view of the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (B) is a perspective view of the back lower right effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right stage production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 142 is an exploded view of the lower right stage production unit for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back lower right effect unit.

  The back lower right effect unit 3200 of this example is attached to the lower right corner outside the opening 3020b in front view in the back box 3020. This back lower right rendering unit 3200 is provided with a unit base 3201 having a substantially square shape in front view mounted in the back box 3020, a rail member 3202 attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3201 and extending in the left-right direction, and left and right by the rail member 3202. A slider 3203 that is slidably supported in a direction, a slide base 3230 that is attached to the front side of the slider 3203 and whose upper end extends to substantially the same height as the unit base 3201, and a base end side that rotates at a predetermined position of the slide base 3230 A bottom right decoration having a plate-like stay portion 3250a that is supported and extends with a predetermined width, and a cylindrical decorative body 3250b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the stay portion 3250a extends from the tip of the stay portion 3250a. A unit 3250.

  The lower right rendering unit 3200 has a long hole-shaped guide portion 3201a extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at the top of the unit base 3201, and is separated in the left-right direction at the top of the slide base 3230. A columnar support pin 3230a is formed which is disposed rearward and extends rearward and is inserted into the guide portion 3201a of the unit base 3201. A washer 3207 and a roller bush 3208 are rotatably inserted into the pair of support pins 3230a of the slide base 3230 so as to sandwich the unit base 3201, and the outer peripheral surface of the roller bush 3208 contacts the inner surface of the guide part 3201a. Then it comes to roll. Accordingly, the upper and lower ends of the slide base 3230 are supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3200 is attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 3201 below the rail member 3202 and has a rotating shaft 3204a extending through the unit base 3201 and extending to the front side. 3204, a spur gear-like drive gear 3205 fixed to the rotating shaft 3204a of the back right lower slide drive motor 3204, and meshes with the drive gear 3205 having a larger diameter than the drive gear 3205 and on the left side of the drive gear 3205 in front view. A slide gear 3206 rotatably supported by the unit base 3201 and a rack gear 3231 that meshes with the slide gear 3206 and is attached to the lower front surface of the slide base 3230 and extend in the left-right direction.

  Further, the back lower right effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear side of the center of the slide base 3230 and has a rotation shaft 3232a extending through the slide base 3230 to the front side. A spur gear-like drive gear 3233 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 3232a of the lower right rotation drive motor 3232, a large-diameter first transmission gear 3234a that meshes with the drive gear 3233, and a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3234a. A transmission gear 3234 having a second transmission gear 3234b that rotates integrally with the first transmission gear 3234a and rotatably supported on the front surface of the slide base 3230, and a back lower right decoration that meshes with the second transmission gear 3234b of the transmission gear 3234. A fan-shaped rotation gear 3251 attached to the base end side of the stay portion 3250a in the unit 3250. . The rotation gear 3251 is supported between the pair of support pins 3230a of the slide base 3230 so as to be rotatable with respect to the slide base 3230 at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The back lower right decoration unit 3250 is supported rotatably.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3200 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3231a extending downward from the vicinity of the front left end of the rack gear 3231 attached to the slide base 3230, and the rack gear 3231 at the front left lower corner of the unit base 3201. A slide position detection sensor 3209 capable of detecting the detection piece 3231a is provided, and the slide position of the slide base 3230 (back lower right decoration unit 3250) can be detected.

  The lower right lower rendering unit 3200 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3234c extending radially outward from the front surface of the transmission gear 3234 that is rotatably supported by the slide base 3230, and the slide base 3230 has a A rotation position detection sensor 3235 capable of detecting the detection piece 3234c of the transmission gear 3234 is provided on the front surface, and the rotation position of the rotation gear 3251, that is, the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is detected by detecting the rotation position of the transmission gear 3234. Can be detected.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3200 is attached to the left front surface of the slide base 3230, and is connected to the back lower right slide drive motor 3204, the slide position detection sensor 3209, the back lower right rotation drive motor 3232, and the rotation position detection sensor 3235. A back lower right relay board 3236 that relays the connection with the motor drive board 3042 attached to the box 3020, and a back lower right decoration that is attached to the front surface of the slide base 3230 so as to surround the upper and left sides of the back right lower relay board 3236. And a wiring cover 3237 that can accommodate a flexible cable (not shown) that connects the decorative board, the drive motor, and the like of the unit 3250 to the back and bottom relay terminal plate 3615 of the back and bottom rendering unit 3600.

  The back lower right effect unit 3200 of this example can slide the entire back lower right decoration unit 3250 in the left-right direction via the slide base 3230 by driving the back lower right slide drive motor 3204. Also, the back lower right rendering unit 3200 is driven by the back right lower rotation drive motor 3232 to change the back lower right decoration unit 3250 from a state in which the decoration main body 3250b is up (normal state) to a substantially horizontal state ( It can be rotated between the state of appearance).

  A stay portion 3250a of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 in the back lower right rendering unit 3200 is rotatably supported by the slide base 3230 and is engaged with a fan-shaped rotation gear 3251 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3234b of the transmission gear 3234. A base base 3252 having a proximal end fixed to the moving gear 3251 and extending outward in the radial direction and formed by bending a metal plate, a plate-like base cover 3253 attached to the front side of the stay base 3252, and a base so as to cover the base cover 3253 A stay front member 3254 formed in a shallow box shape attached to the front side of the cover 3253 and decorated on the front surface and having an opening 3254a penetrating in the front-rear direction and opened on the rear side, and an opening 3254a of the stay front member 3254 It is placed so as to be closed from the rear side and has translucency that can diffuse light A lens member 3255, a back lower right stay decorative board (not shown) that is disposed between the lens member 3255 and the base cover 3253 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; And a frame-shaped partition member (not shown) that blocks and blocks light from the LED.

  The stay base 3252 in the stay portion 3250a of the back lower right decorative unit 3250 is not illustrated in detail, but is formed in a substantially L shape with the tip side extending in the same direction as the direction in which the decorative main body 3250b extends. The decoration main body 3250b is attached to the extended part. Further, as shown in the drawing, the lens member 3255 in the stay portion 3250a is formed with finely spaced streaks extending in the same direction as the direction in which the stay portion 3250a extends, and with respect to the direction in which the stay portion 3250a extends. It is formed into a shape that is divided into five parts by a straight line extending in a right angle direction. The stay portion 3250a is divided into five in the extending direction of the stay portion 3250a so that the partition member arranged on the rear side of the lens member 3255 corresponds to the shape of the lens member 3255 divided into five. The LEDs on the back lower right decorative board are arranged at positions corresponding to the grids of the partition members. Accordingly, the five parts of the lens member 3255 can be independently decorated with light emission, and for example, a light emission effect such as a meter can be performed by sequentially emitting light from one side. Can be done.

  In addition, the decoration main body 3250b in the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is attached to the tip of the stay base 3252 of the stay portion 3250a and extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the stay portion 3250a extends, and the main body base (not shown). A semi-cylindrical lower body decorative body 3261 having a semi-cylindrical shape attached to the main body base so as to cover the front side of the base and having an indeterminate shape at the distal end, and a proximal end side disposed on the distal end side of the lower main decorative element 3261 A semi-cylindrical main body upper front decorative member 3262 formed in a shape along the shape of the front end side of the lower main body decorative member 3261, and the rear upper end of the main body upper decorative member 3262 and the lower main body decorative member 3261 are continuous. A main body rear decoration member 3263 that is formed so as to cover the rear side of the main body base and is attached to the main body base, a main body lower front decoration member 3261, and the main body A lens member 3264 (see FIG. 143 (f)) that is disposed between the front decoration member 3262 and the main body base and has a curved plate shape with a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface, and a lens member 3264; A back lower right main body decorative board (not shown) disposed between the main body base and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Although not shown, the main body base of the decorative main body 3250b is in a state in which the main body lower front decorative member 3261 and the main body upper front decorative member 3262 are brought close to each other (a normal state shown in FIG. 139 and the like). The length of the decorative member 3262 protrudes from the front end side. The decoration main body 3250b further includes an outer peripheral decoration member 3266 that is disposed so as to straddle the outer periphery of the lower main body decoration member 3261 and the main body rear decoration member 3263, and is formed in a red transparent and flame-like shape. .

  The decorative main body 3250b is disposed coaxially with the front front decorative member 3262 at the front end side of the front front decorative member 3262 and is rotatably supported with respect to the main body base. A main body head decoration member 3267 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having the same diameter as the decoration member 3262 and the like is further provided.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the decoration main body 3250b is attached to the rear end of the front end of the main body base and has a back right lower head slide drive motor having a rotating shaft that extends through the main body base and extends to the front side. A spur gear-like pinion gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the back right lower head slide drive motor, and a rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear and extends in the direction in which the decorative main body 3250b extends and protrudes outward from the front end of the main body base. A rack member that is slidably supported by the main body base, a head base that is fixed to the front end of the rack member and to which the front upper decorative member 3262 is attached, and a lower front decorative member formed in a cylindrical shape 3261 and a back right lower head rotation drive motor having a rotation shaft protruding outward from the tip of the head base on the center axis of the front decorative member 3262 on the main body and attached to the head base Comprises a disc-shaped support member inner bottom of the body head decorative member 3267 is attached is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lower right head rotation drive motor.

  Although the detailed illustration of the decorative main body 3250b is omitted, a rack cover that covers the front side of the rack member and supports the rack member slidably in cooperation with the main body base and is attached to the front surface of the main body base; Back right lower head decoration board mounted on the front and mounted with multiple LEDs on the front, and back right lower head decoration position attached to the rear side of the lower right lower head decoration board and detecting the slide position of the rack member A detection sensor and a back right lower head rotation position detection sensor which is attached to the head base and detects the rotation position of the main body head decoration member.

  The main body lower front decorative member 3261 and the main body front decorative member 3262 of the decorative main body 3250b are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster (silver color) at the axial end, and the outer peripheral surface excluding the end is transparent. It is formed so as to have a light property, and can be decorated with light emission by the back lower right main body decoration board. In addition, a base-base relief of baseball with a pointed tip side is formed at the center of the tip side of the front decorative member 3262 on the main body so as to have translucency (red transparent). Further, the main body head decoration member 3267 is formed with a triangular relief whose apex faces the base end on the outer peripheral surface, and the portion of this relief has translucency (red transparent), and other portions A plating layer having a metallic luster (silver color) is provided on the surface. Thereby, the decoration main body 3250b in the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is formed in a shape imitating a cylindrical time bomb.

  The decorative main body 3250b is configured such that a bottomed cylindrical main body head decorative member 3267 can be rotated around its axis by driving a back right lower head rotation driving motor, and the back right lower head. The main body upper decorative member 3262 and the main body head decorative member 3267 can be slid in the axial direction by driving the partial slide drive motor. Thus, for example, the main body head decoration member 3267 is rotated in a state where the main body lower front decoration member 3261 and the main body upper front decoration member 3262 are brought close to each other, and the apex of the home base-like relief in the main body upper front decoration member 3262 And the top of the main body head decoration member 3267 match the apex of the triangular relief, the main body head decoration member 3267 is stopped from rotating, and then the main body upper front decoration member 3262 and the main body head front decoration member 3261 are moved away from the main body lower front decoration member 3261. By sliding the main body head decoration member 3267, the rear lens member 3264 comes to face the player side from between the lower front decoration member 3261 and the upper front decoration member 3262, and the decorative main body 3250b is broken. It is possible to perform a movable effect such as exploding as if the decoration body 3250b is regarded as a time bomb. So that the can.

  Next, the operation of the back lower right effect unit 3200 of this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 143 (a) or the like, the back lower right effect unit 3200 of the present example has the slide base 3230 positioned at the left moving end in a front view in a normal state (normal position state). The cylindrical decorative main body 3250b in the lower right lower decorative unit 3250 is in a standing state. In this normal state, the detection piece 3231a of the rack gear 3231 attached to the slide base 3230 for sliding the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is detected by the slide position detection sensor 3209, and the back lower right decoration unit. The detection piece 3234c of the transmission gear 3234 that rotates the 3250 is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3235.

  Further, when the back right lower decoration unit 3250 of the back lower right effect unit 3200 is in the normal position, only the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is visible from the player side, and the stay portion 3250a. Is positioned outside the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and cannot be visually recognized (see FIG. 111 and the like). Thereby, the player can be strongly aware of the decoration main body 3250b in the back lower right decoration unit 3250.

  From this normal position state, a movable effect using the back lower right effect unit 3200 is started in accordance with a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. Then, the back right lower slide drive motor 3204 and the back right lower rotation drive motor 3232 start to be driven simultaneously, the slide base 3230 starts to slide rightward when viewed from the front, and the back lower right decorative unit 3250 Rotation in the counterclockwise direction is started (see FIGS. 143 (b) and (c)). When the slide base 3230 slides to the right moving end in front view and rotates until the decoration body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 becomes horizontal, the back lower right slide drive motor 3204 and the back lower right turn The drive of the drive motor 3232 is stopped and the back lower right decorative unit 3250 is in the first appearance position (see FIG. 143 (d)).

  In the state where the back lower right decoration unit 3250 in the back lower right effect unit 3200 is positioned at the first appearance position, the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is located above the lower edge of the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In addition to being positioned, the stay portion 3250a of the back lower right decorative unit 3250 is visible from the player side (see FIG. 153). Thus, the cylindrical decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 can appear to float on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decoration main body 3250b. The decoration main body 3250b can be noticed.

  In the back lower right effect unit 3200 of this example, when the back lower right decoration unit 3250 moves from the normal position to the first appearance position, the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is replaced by the stay portion 3250a and the cylindrical decorative body 3250b. After forming the L-shape, the base end side of the stay portion 3250a is set as the rotation center, and the entire back lower right decoration unit 3250 is slid in the right direction and at the same time the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is moved in the counterclockwise direction. Since it is made to rotate, the movement amount in the left-right direction on the base end side of the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 becomes smaller than the movement amount of the slide base 3230, and the decoration main body 3250b is as if it is the base. An illusion can be made as if it rotates about the end side.

  After the back lower right decoration unit 3250 of the back lower right effect unit 3200 is moved from the normal position to the first appearance position, only the back lower right slide drive motor 3204 is driven in the reverse direction, and the back right lower decoration unit 3250 The back lower right decoration unit 3250 is slid leftward in a front view together with the slide base 3230 while the decoration body 3250b is horizontal. When the slide base 3230 slides to the left moving end and the detection piece 3231a of the rack gear 3231 is detected by the slide position detection sensor 3209, the driving of the back lower right slide drive motor 3204 is stopped. Thereby, the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is moved from the first appearance position to the second appearance position (see FIG. 143 (e)).

  In a state where the back lower right decoration unit 3250 of the back lower right effect unit 3200 is positioned at the second appearance position, the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is positioned at the substantially center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in a state where it is located in a very conspicuous position from the player side (see FIG. 154).

  With the back lower right decoration unit 3250 positioned at the second appearance position, the back lower right head drive motor provided in the decoration main body 3250b is driven to move the main body head decoration member 3267 in the decoration main body 3250b in the left-right direction. Rotate around the extended axis. When the apex of the triangular relief in the main body head decoration member 3267 and the apex of the home base-like relief in the upper front decoration member 3262 coincide with each other, the driving of the back right lower head rotation drive motor is stopped and the main body The rotation of the head decoration member 3267 is stopped.

  Thereafter, the back right lower head slide drive motor provided in the decoration main body 3250b is driven so that the main body head decoration member 3267, the upper front decoration member 3262, and the lower front decoration member 3261 move away from each other. The main body head decoration member 3267 and the front upper decoration member 3262 are slid leftward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 143 (f)). As a result, the ends of the upper front decorative member 3261 and the lower front decorative member 3261 that are opposed to each other and formed in a ruptured shape are separated from each other, and the lens member 3264 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. As a result, the explosion main body 3250b is broken.

  In the lower right production unit 3200, the LED mounted on the lower right stay decoration board, the lower right main body decoration board, the lower right head decoration board, etc. in accordance with the movement of the lower right decoration unit 3250. It is designed to emit light as appropriate, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted. Further, in order to return the lower right decoration unit 3250 from the explosion position to the normal position, each of the drive motors 3204, 3232, etc. is driven in the opposite direction, thereby returning the lower right decoration unit 3250 to the normal position. Can be made.

  In addition to the effects from the normal position to the explosion position described above, the movable effects using the back lower right effect unit 3200 are from the normal position to the first appearance position, from the normal position to the second appearance position, and so on. In addition, it can be appropriately selected according to the lottery result of the special lottery, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

  Thus, according to the back lower right effect unit 3200 of this example, the stay portion 3250a is provided with the stay portion 3250a extending in the direction perpendicular to the cylindrical axis from the base end of the cylindrical decorative body 3250b. The back lower right decoration unit 3250 including the decoration main body 3250b is rotated on the base end side, and at the same time, the entire back lower right decoration unit 3250 is slid. At the same time, the height of the base end side of the decoration body 3250b can be moved from a low position to a high position, as if the base end side of the decoration body 3250b is the rotation center. And the decoration body 3250b can be rotated without any problem, and the large decoration body 3250b rotates. Interest in the game to surprise the player can be prevented from being lowered by.

[2-8. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146. FIG. 144 is a front view of the back left effect unit, the back right effect unit, and the back middle effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front in a state where the back left effect unit, the back right effect unit, and the back middle effect unit in the back unit are separated, and FIG. 146 is the back left effect unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back in the state which isolate | separated the back right effect unit and the back middle effect unit, respectively.

  The back left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020 and extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the upper end of the back left unit base 3301 as shown in the figure. A back left motor base 3302 that extends forward in a shelf shape, a back left lifting drive motor 3303 that is attached to the upper surface of the back left motor base 3302 and whose rotating shaft extends to the lower side of the back left motor base 3302, and a back left A spur gear-like drive gear 3304 fixed to the rotation shaft of the elevating drive motor 3303, a driven gear 3305 that meshes with the drive gear 3304 and is arranged on the left side of the drive gear 3304, and a rotation shaft center of the driven gear 3305. The upper end is fixed and the lower end extends to the center of the back left unit base 3301 in the vertical direction. Further, the elevating drive shaft 3306 which is rotatably supported by the back left unit base 3301 at the lower end and has a spiral groove 3306a formed on the outer periphery, and the groove 3306a in a state of protruding from the groove 3306a of the elevating drive shaft 3306. A spherical transmission ball (not shown) that can roll, and a transmission ball that rotatably supports the transmission ball so that the transmission ball does not fall out of the groove 3306 a of the lifting drive shaft 3306 and a part of the lifting drive shaft 3306 is supported. The back left elevating slider 3307 having a support pin 3307a for supporting the left end side of the back middle production unit 3500, and the back left elevating slider 3307 are slidably guided in the vertical direction and the back left unit base 3301. The upper and lower ends are supported by the same length as the lifting drive shaft 3306. A back left elevating position detection sensor 3309 (FIG. 147) mounted on a predetermined position of the back left unit base 3301 and capable of detecting the elevating position of the back left elevating slider 3307, which is arranged in parallel with the descending drive shaft 3306. (See (C)).

  The back left unit base 3301 of the back left effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened by a translucent material, and is longer than the vertical size of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020. The upper end and the lower end are mounted in the back box 3020 so that the upper end and the lower end extend above and below the opening 3020b, respectively. Further, the back left unit base 3301 supports the lifting drive shaft 3306 and the guide shaft 3308 from the center in the left-right direction in the front view to the left front, and supports the guide shaft 3308 on the right side of the lift drive shaft 3306 in the front view. Yes. Further, the back left unit base 3301 has a geometric relief-like decoration formed on the right front surface from the center in the left-right direction.

  Although detailed illustration of the back left effect unit 3300 is omitted, about half of a transmission ball formed in a spherical shape with metal is inserted into a spiral groove 3306a in the elevating drive shaft 3306. About half of the transmission ball is supported by the back left elevating slider 3307 in a rotatable and immovable state. Further, the back left elevating slider 3307 is slidable with respect to the elevating drive shaft 3306 and the guide shaft 3308, and the elevating drive shaft 3306 and the guide shaft 3308 cannot move in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Yes. In this example, the groove 3306a of the lifting drive shaft 3306 is formed at an angle of about 45 °.

  In this state, when the lift drive shaft 3306 is rotated by the back left lift drive motor 3303 via the drive gear 3304 and the driven gear 3305, the groove 3306a formed on the outer periphery of the lift drive shaft 3306 extends obliquely. The transmission ball is pushed by the oblique groove 3306a, but the position of the transmission ball is restricted by the back left lifting slider 3307, and the back left lifting slider 3307 moves in the axial direction of the lifting drive shaft 3306 together with the transmission ball. Will be. In this example, when the elevating drive shaft 3306 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the back left elevating slider 3307 is lowered, and when the elevating drive shaft 3306 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the back left The elevating slider 3307 is raised.

  According to the back left effect unit 3300 of this example, the load applied from the back left lift slider 3307 acts on the lift drive shaft 3306 from the transmission ball via the spiral groove 3306a. Since it is inclined with respect to the axis of 3306, the force acting in the direction of rotating the lifting drive shaft 3306 with respect to the magnitude of the load acting downward from the transmission ball becomes as small as possible. That is, even if a large load is applied from the back left lift slider 3307, the back left lift slider 3307 can be prevented from descending and stopped by blocking the rotation of the lift drive shaft 3306 with a small force. The rear left elevating slider 3307 can be maintained in a stopped state without providing a lock mechanism or the like. Accordingly, even a heavy object can reduce the load applied to the back left lifting drive motor 3303 via the lifting drive shaft 3306, and it is possible to prevent a problem from being caused by an overload, as well as a large one and various mechanisms. Even if it is heavier, it can be stopped and raised without problems.

  The support pin 3307a of the back left elevating slider 3307 in the back left effect unit 3300 extends forward in a columnar shape as shown in the figure, and a roller is inserted into a support hole 3501c of the left support member 3501 in the back center effect unit 3500 described later. It is inserted through a bush 3504. Although not shown, a washer and a screw for preventing the roller bushing 3504 from coming off are attached to the front end of the support pin 3307a.

  Also, the back left rendering unit 3300 is attached near the rear end of the back left unit base 3301 and extends in the vertical direction, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear left unit base 3301 rear end. A lower left decorative board 3311 mounted on the lower part and mounted with a plurality of LEDs in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the front surface. With the back left decorative substrate 3310 and the back left lower decorative substrate 3311, the back left effect unit 3300 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, the rear left rendering unit 3300 has a rotational axis at the rear center of the rear left unit base 3301 at a substantially central position in the vertical direction between the lower end of the lift drive shaft 3306 and the lower end of the rear left unit base 3301 in the rear left unit base 3301. A rear left rotation drive motor 3312 attached to the front surface of the rear left unit base 3301 so as to extend to the rear left, a spur gear-like drive gear 3313 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear left rotation drive motor 3312, and a drive gear A fan-shaped driven gear 3314 meshing with 3313, and a rear end thereof is fixed to the rotational axis of the driven gear 3314, and a front end extends to the front side of the rear left unit base 3301 and is rotatably supported by the rear left unit base 3301. A rotating shaft 3315 and a motorcycle handlebar are fixed to the front end side of the rotating shaft 3315 and are partially translucent. In the back left unit base 3301, a back left decorative body 3320 simulating a back left decorative body 3320 attached to the rear side of the back left decorative body 3320 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (not shown). A back left rotation position detection sensor 3316 which is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface and can detect the rotation position by detecting a detection piece 3320a of the back left decorative body 3320.

  Note that the back left decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 is in a state of a normal position that rises substantially vertically and a state of an appearance position in which the upper end side moves to the center side of the game area 1100 in front view (see FIG. 149). (See)). Further, when the back left decorative body 3320 is in the normal position, the detection piece 3320a is detected by the back left rotation position detection sensor 3316.

[2-9. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146. The back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the right side of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020 and above the back right effect unit 3200 and extends vertically, and is attached to the upper end of the back right unit base 3401. A rear right motor base 3402 extending in a shelf shape forward, a rear right elevating drive motor 3403 attached to the upper surface of the rear right motor base 3402 and having a rotation shaft extending to the lower side of the rear right motor base 3402; A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the right lifting drive motor 3403, a driven gear (not shown) meshed with the drive gear and disposed on the right side of the drive gear in front view, and driven The upper end is fixed to the rotation axis of the gear, and the lower end extends from the upper end of the back right unit base 3401 to a height that is about 1/4 lower than the entire height. A lift drive shaft 3406 that is rotatably supported by the back right unit base 3401 at the side and the lower end and has a spiral groove 3406a formed on the outer periphery, and the groove 3406a in a state of protruding from the groove 3406a of the lift drive shaft 3406. And a spherical transmission ball (not shown).

  Further, the back right effect unit 3400 supports the transfer ball so that the transfer ball does not fall out of the groove 3406a of the elevating drive shaft 3406 and can cover a part of the elevating drive shaft 3406. The back right elevating slider 3407 having a support pin 3407a for supporting the right end side of the 3500, and the back right elevating slider 3407 are guided to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower ends are supported by the back right unit base 3401 and driven up and down A guide shaft 3408 that is substantially the same length as the shaft 3406 and is arranged in parallel with the lift drive shaft 3406, and a back right that is attached to a predetermined position of the back right unit base 3401 and that can detect the lift position of the back right lift slider 3407. The lift position detection sensor 3409 and the back right unit base 3401 A back right decorative substrate 3410 in which a plurality of LED on the front mounted is mounted on the side, and a.

  The back right unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper end extends upward from the upper end of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020, and the lower end is the lower end of the opening 3020b. It is formed in the size which becomes substantially the same height. Further, the back right unit base 3401 supports the elevating drive shaft 3406 and the guide shaft 3408 from the center in the left-right direction in the front view to the right front, and supports the guide shaft 3408 on the right side of the elevating drive shaft 3406 in the front view. Yes. Further, the back right unit base 3401 has a geometric relief-like decoration formed on the front side on the left side and the lower side of the elevation drive shaft 3406 and a plate-like shape extending forward from the right end. A decoration portion 3401a is provided. Note that the back right effect unit 3400 is configured so that the relief-like decoration of the back right unit base 3401 can be illuminated and illuminated by the LEDs of the back right decoration board 3410.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back-right effect unit 3400 is similar to the back-left effect unit 3300, in the groove 3406a formed in a spiral shape in the elevating drive shaft 3406. About half of the ball is inserted, and about half of the transmission ball is supported by the back right elevating slider 3407 in a rotatable and immovable state. Further, the back right elevating slider 3407 is slidable with respect to the elevating drive shaft 3406 and the guide shaft 3408, and the elevating drive shaft 3406 and the guide shaft 3408 cannot move in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Yes. In this example, the groove 3406a of the lifting drive shaft 3406 is formed at an angle of about 45 °.

  In this state, when the up / down drive shaft 3406 is rotated by the back right up / down drive motor 3403 via the drive gear and the driven gear, the groove 3406a formed on the outer periphery of the up / down drive shaft 3406 extends obliquely. The ball is pushed into the oblique groove 3406a, but the position of the transmission ball is regulated by the back right lifting slider 3407, and the back right lifting slider 3407 moves in the axial direction of the lifting drive shaft 3406 together with the transmission ball. It becomes. In this example, when the elevating drive shaft 3406 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the back right elevating slider 3407 is lowered, and when the elevating drive shaft 3406 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the rear right The elevating slider 3407 is raised.

  According to the back right effect unit 3400 of this example, the load applied from the back right lift slider 3407 acts on the lift drive shaft 3406 from the transmission ball via the spiral groove 3406a. Since it is inclined with respect to the axis of 3406, the force acting in the direction of rotating the lifting drive shaft 3406 with respect to the magnitude of the load acting downward from the transmission ball becomes as small as possible. That is, even if a large load is applied from the back right lifting slider 3407, the back right lifting slider 3407 can be prevented from descending and stopped by blocking the rotation of the lifting drive shaft 3406 with a small force. Even if a lock mechanism or the like is not provided, the back right elevating slider 3407 can be maintained in a stopped state. Therefore, even a heavy object can reduce the load applied to the back right elevating drive motor 3403 via the elevating drive shaft 3406, and it is possible to prevent a problem from being caused by an overload, as well as a large size and various mechanisms. Even if it is heavier, it can be stopped and raised without problems.

  Also, the support pin 3407a of the back right elevating slider 3407 in the back right effect unit 3400 extends forward in a columnar shape as shown in the drawing, and is in a support hole 3502c of the right support member 3502 in the back middle effect unit 3500 described later. It is inserted through a roller bush 3504. Although not shown, a washer and a screw for preventing the roller bushing 3504 from coming off are attached to the front end of the support pin 3407a.

[2-10. Back middle production unit]
Next, the back middle production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146. The back middle production unit 3500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped support plate portion 3501a extending in the left-right direction substantially along the surface of the game panel 1200, a receiving portion 3501c extending forward from the right end of the support plate portion 3501a, and A support pin 3307a, which is disposed in the vicinity of the left end at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the support plate portion 3501a and extends forward from the back left lift slider 3307 in the back left rendering unit 3300, is slidably inserted and penetrates in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. A left support member 3501 having a long hole-like support hole 3501c, a plate-like support plate portion 3502a substantially along the surface of the game panel 1200, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the left end of the support plate portion 3502a. The back-right lift slider 340 in the back-right effect unit 3400 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction above the receiving part 3502b and the support plate part 3502a. A support pin 3407a extending forward from the right support member 3502 having a support hole 3502c penetrating in the front-rear direction and a right support member 3502 and a left support member 3501 are connected to each other to connect a metal plate. And a bent connection member 3503.

  The left support member 3501 and the right support member 3502 in the back middle production unit 3500 are respectively provided with the support pins 3307a and the back right production unit 3400 of the back left lifting slider 3307 in the back left production unit 3300 with respect to the respective support holes 3501c and 3502c. A support pin 3407a of the back right elevating slider 3407 is rotatably supported via a roller bush 3504. The roller bushing 3504 includes a flange extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the front end, and is inserted into the support pins 3307a and 3407a from the front side of the left support member 3501 and the right support member 3502 through the support holes 3501c and 3502c. ing. Although not shown in the drawing, these roller bushes 3504 are prevented from being removed from the support pins 3307a and 3407a by washers and screws fixed to the tips of the support pins 3307a and 3407a, and are supported to the left via the roller bushing 3504. The member 3501 and the right support member 3502 prevent the support pins 3307a and 3407a from coming off.

  Further, the back middle production unit 3500 is disposed between the receiving portions 3501b and 3502b of the left support member 3501 and the right support member 3502 that are supported by the connecting member 3503 so as to be separated from each other, and the rear side is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape. A box-shaped unit base 3510 and a cylindrical shaft member attached to the left and right ends of the unit base 3510 and rotatably supported by the receiving portions 3501b and 3502b of the left support member 3501 and the right support member 3502 (not shown) ), A driven gear (not shown) that rotates integrally with the shaft member on the right side of the front view and is disposed on the right side of the receiving portion 3502b in the right support member 3502, and a spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) meshed with the driven gear. (Omitted), and the drive gear is fixed to the rotation shaft and is driven to rotate in the middle of the right support member 3502 disposed on the front side of the support plate 3502a. It comprises a chromatography motor, a motor base attached on the right side of the receiving part 3502b in the right support member 3502 covers the driven gear and the driving gear to support the back during rotation drive motor.

  Further, the back middle production unit 3500 includes a rotation position detection sensor 3516 attached to the rear side of the right shaft member in a front view and capable of detecting the rotation position of the unit base 3510. The rotation position detection sensor 3516 is configured to rotate together with the unit base 3510, and is a detection piece (leftward extending from a position behind the rotation axis in the receiving portion 3502b of the right support member 3502). The rotation position of the unit base 3510 can be detected by detecting (not shown). In this example, when the unit base 3510 is in the state of FIG. 144 (normal position state), the rotation position detection sensor 3516 detects the detection piece.

  Further, the back middle production unit 3500 is attached to a substantially center in the front-rear direction in the box-shaped unit base 3510 and has a plate-shaped middle cover 3517 for partitioning the inside of the unit base 3510; A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back side decorative board 3518, a frame-like logo frame 3519 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3510, and attached to the front side of the logo frame 3519, not shown, but on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 A translucent logo lens 3520 in which a predetermined logo conforming to the concept is three-dimensionally formed. The back middle effect unit 3500 of this example can light-decorate the logo lens 3520 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface side of the back inner decorative substrate 3518 to emit light.

  The back middle production unit 3500 includes a unit base cover 3530 that closes the rear end opening of the box-shaped unit base 3510, and three units that are attached so as to protrude rearward from the unit base cover 3530 and are arranged in the left-right direction. Rotating lamp unit 3550 (right rotating lamp 3550R, middle rotating lamp 3550M, left rotating lamp 3550L), and back cover 3531 which covers half of rotating lamp unit 3550 (upper side in FIG. 146) and is attached to the rear side of unit base cover 3530. It is equipped with. Although not shown in the figure, the unit base cover 3530 is formed with three through-holes having a large diameter and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion where the rotary lamp unit 3550 is attached. In these rotary lamp units 3550, the middle rotary lamp 3550M arranged at the center in the left-right direction has a larger diameter than the left rotary lamp 3550L and the right rotary lamp 3550R arranged on the left and right (FIG. 148 (B)). Etc.).

  The three rotary lamp units 3550 in the back production unit 3500 have the same configuration, and detailed illustration thereof is omitted. However, a disk-shaped base disposed coaxially with the through hole on the rear side of the unit base cover 3530 is omitted. A reflector having a metallic luster on the surface, and a reflective portion extending in a right-angled direction from the base portion so as to cover the opening. And an opening that is fixed to the base portion through the through hole of the unit base cover 3530 so as to sandwich the unit base cover 3530 in cooperation with the base portion of the reflector, and at the rear side of the unit base cover 3530 A reflector gear (not shown) having a spur gear-like gear portion on the outer periphery thereof is meshed with the reflector gear. A small-diameter gear, a transmission gear (not shown in the figure) that is rotatably disposed integrally with the small-diameter gear and that is larger in diameter than the small-diameter gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base cover 3530; A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the large-diameter gear, a rotary lamp drive motor 3555 that has a rotary shaft fixed to the center of the drive gear and is attached to the rear side of the unit base cover 3530, and a unit base cover A semi-spherical and transparent lamp cover 3556 that is attached to the rear side of 3530 and covers the remaining portion covered by the back cover 3531.

  The rotating lamp unit 3550 includes a light guide member (not shown) that is sandwiched between the base portion of the reflector and the reflector gear and that can guide light in the axial direction of the through hole in the unit base cover 3530. ing. In the back middle production unit 3500 of this example, a plurality of high-brightness LEDs that can irradiate light rearward are mounted at positions that are substantially coaxial with the through hole of the unit base cover 3530 on the rear surface of the back inner decorative substrate 3518. The light from the high-intensity LED is guided to the reflecting portion of the reflector by the light guide member, and reflected by the reflecting portion of the reflector in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, and the light is irradiated to the outside through the lamp cover 3556. Can be done.

  The rotating lamp unit 3550 includes a rotational position detection sensor (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the back inner decorative substrate 3518 and detects the rotational position of the reflector. Although the back middle production unit 3500 of this example is not shown in detail, an opening that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed at a position coaxial with the through hole of the unit base cover 3530 in the middle cover 3517, and a reflector. A detection piece that extends forward through the opening of the middle cover 3517 is provided on the front surface of the gear, and the detection piece is detected by a rotational position detection sensor attached to the back inner decoration board 3518 to thereby reflect the reflector. The rotation position of can be detected. In addition, in the state which detected the detection piece of the reflector gear with the rotation position detection sensor, the reflection part of a reflector will be in the state which faced the back cover 3531 side.

  When the rotary lamp unit 3550 in the back middle effect unit 3500 is rotated by the rotary lamp driving motor 3555 in a state where the high-intensity LED mounted on the rear surface of the back middle decorative board 3518 emits light, Will rotate, and the direction of the light guided by the light guide member and reflected by the reflecting portion will change so as to rotate around the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the optical axis like the light of the lighthouse turns, and to attract the player's attention strongly.

  The back middle production unit 3500 of this example extends in the left-right direction through a unit base 3510 to which a logo lens 3520, a rotating lamp unit 3550, and the like are attached by a left support member 3501 and a right support member 3502 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. It can be rotated around the axis. In the normal state, the inside production unit 3500 is positioned such that the logo lens 3520 faces the front (player side) as shown in FIG. 144 and the like. In this normal position state, the three rotary lamp units 3550 are positioned directly behind the logo lens 3520 and are not visible to the player. In this state, by driving the back side rotation drive motor 3514, when the unit base 3510 is rotated about 90 ° around the axis extending in the left-right direction so that the logo lens 3520 is directed upward, the unit base 3510 is arranged in the left-right direction. The three hemispherical rotating lamp units 3550 thus formed are bulged downward and can be viewed from the player side (appearance position state).

  Then, in a state where the rotary lamp unit 3550 is visible from the player side, the rotary lamp drive motor 3555 is driven and the corresponding high-intensity LED on the back decorative board 3518 is caused to emit light, thereby rotating the optical axis. Such a light emission effect can be shown to the player. The three rotary lamp units 3550 can be independently moved. Various combinations of the movements of the three rotary lamp units 3550 can be appropriately combined to perform various light emission effects. It has become.

[2-11. About the movement of the back left production unit, the back right production unit, and the back middle production unit]
Next, the movement of the back left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, and the back middle effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing movements of the back left effect unit, the back right effect unit, and the back middle effect unit. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing movement different from that in FIG. Further, FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decorative body in the back left effect unit of the back unit.

  In the back unit 3000 of this example, as described above, the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3020b in the back box 3020, respectively. The left and right ends of the back middle production unit 3500 are supported by the back left raising / lowering slider 3307 and the support pins 3307a and 3407a of the back right raising / lowering slider 3407 in the right production unit 3400.

  As shown in FIG. 147 and the like, the back middle effect unit 3500 of this example includes a back left lifting slider 3307 of the back left effect unit 3300 and a back right lifting slider 3407 of the back right effect unit 3400 in a normal state. , Respectively, are the most elevated positions (positions at the ascending end). In this state, the horizontally long rectangular logo lens 3520 in the back middle production unit 3500 extends substantially horizontally, and the logo lens 3520 in the front view has a lower side of the center logo decoration member 2641 in the center accessory 2500. The position (height) is in contact.

  In this normal state, the back left elevating drive motor 3303 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right elevating drive motor 3403 of the back right effect unit 3400 are simultaneously driven, and the back right elevating slider 3407 of the back right effect unit 3400 is driven. The back middle production unit 3500 is lowered in a substantially parallel state to the position of the lowering end (first lowering position) (see FIG. 147 (B)). In this state, the logo lens 3520 of the back middle production unit 3500 is slightly lowered toward the center of the game area 1100 in a front view, and is slightly separated from the center logo decoration member 2641 in the center accessory 2500.

  When the back middle production unit 3500 is in the first lowered position and the back left raising / lowering drive motor 3303 of the back left production unit 3300 is further driven to lower only the back left raising / lowering slider 3307, the right support of the back middle production unit 3500 is supported. The member 3502 is supported by the support pin 3407a of the back-right lift slider 3407 in the back-right effect unit 3400 by the circular support hole 3502c, whereas the left support member 3501 is the back-left effect by the long hole-shaped support hole 3501c. Since the support pin 3307a of the unit 3300 is supported by the support pin 3307a of the back left elevating slider 3307, the support pin 3307a slides in the long support hole 3501c, and at the same time, the left end side of the back center production unit 3500 descends, The logo lens 3520 is inclined. Then, when the back left raising / lowering slider 3307 of the back left effect unit 3300 is lowered to the lowest lowered position (second lower position), the inclination of the logo lens 3520 (back middle effect unit 3500) becomes maximum (FIG. 147). (See (C)).

  As a result, the logo lens 3520 with the logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be tilted so that the player can recognize that the balance is lost at first glance. It can be thought that the game state is changed from the normal game state to a special game state, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, the back middle production unit 3500 (logo lens 3520) is loosely moved by moving the left end side up and down between the first lowered position and the second lowered position by the rear left production unit 3300. It is possible to perform a movable production such as shaking, and to enjoy the movement of the back middle production unit 3500.

  On the other hand, after changing the back middle effect unit 3500 from the normal position to the first lowered position (see FIG. 148A), the back middle rotation drive motor 3514 in the back middle effect unit 3500 is driven. The unit base 3510 is rotated by 90 ° about the axis extending in the left-right direction so that the logo lens 3520 faces upward. Then, at the same time that the logo lens 3520 is faced upward and becomes almost invisible, three rotating lamp units 3550 bulging downward from the lower side appear and become visible from the player side (appearance position state) (see FIG. 148 (B)). As a result, the appearance of the back middle production unit 3500 has changed greatly, which can attract the player's interest strongly and can make it seem that there is something good, increasing the expectation of the game. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  While the back middle production unit 3500 is set to the first lowered position and the three rotary lamp units 3550 are set to the appearance positions, the rotary lamp driving motors 3555 of the rotary lamp unit 3550 are rotated and the corresponding back middle decorative board 3518 is rotated. By making the high-intensity LED emit light, it is possible to attract the player's interest more strongly by the rotating rotating lamp, and also to attract the interest of the pachinko machine 1 to other players strongly. Yes, you can entertain the player.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (C), with the rotary lamp unit 3550 of the back middle production unit 3500 in the appearance position, the back left lift slider 3307 of the back left production unit 3300 is set to the first lowered position. The pachinko machine 1 can be moved up and down between the two descending positions and can present the player with a moving atmosphere different from that of the logo lens 3520. can do.

  By the way, the back left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a back left decorative body 3320 simulating a handle lever of a motorcycle, in addition to a mechanism for raising and lowering the back effect unit 3500. The back left decorative body 3320 in the back left effect unit 3300 is in a state of rising substantially vertically in a normal state, and the right side portion is slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. (See FIG. 110 and the like). The back left decorative body 3320 is rotated from the normal state by the back left rotation drive motor 3312 so that the distal end side moves to the center side of the game area 1100 around the base end side (lower end side). The substantially whole can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 149). The back left decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 is caused to appear by rotating so that the tip side moves to the center side of the game area 1100 in front view, thereby suggesting that the player has a chance or the like. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

[2-12. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG. 150A is a perspective view of the lower back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150B is a perspective view of the back lower effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower back effect unit in the back unit.

  The back lower direction production unit 3600 in this example is attached to the lower side of the opening 3020b at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the back box 3020, and below the transparent stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000. Arranged on the side. This back bottom rendering unit 3600 is attached to a rear wall 3020a in the back box 3020. The unit base 3601 has a pair of long-hole-shaped guide portions 3601a that are separated in the left-right direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the up-down direction. And a pair of sliders 3602 arranged on the front side of the unit base 3601 and guided respectively by a pair of guide portions and having a rack gear 3602a on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rack base 3602a of the slider 3602 at the left when viewed from the front. A spur gear-like pinion gear 3603 rotatably supported by 3601, a drive gear 3604 meshing with the pinion gear 3603, a back underside drive motor 3605 with a rotation shaft fixed to the center of the drive gear 3604, and a back underside drive While supporting the motor 3605, the drive gear 3604 and the back bottom drive motor 3 A motor base 3606 attached to the front side of the deployed unit base 3601 between the 05, and a.

  The lower back effect unit 3600 has a vertical portion 3607a attached to the front surface of each of the pair of sliders 3602 and extending in the vertical direction, and a horizontal portion 3607b extending in the horizontal direction by connecting the upper ends of the vertical portions 3607a. A frame-shaped movable frame 3607 provided with relief-like decoration, a driven gear 3608 that meshes with a rack gear 3602a in the slider 3602 on the right side when viewed from the front and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3601, and a unit base 3601 A back lower back decorative board 3609 attached to the upper rear side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, a slide detection sensor (not shown) attached to the front side of the unit base 3601 and capable of detecting the slide position of the slider 3602. It has.

  Further, the lower back rendering unit 3600 is arranged on the front side of the movable frame 3607 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3601 and the front decoration base 3611 is attached to the upper front portion of the front decoration base 3611 and has a keyboard such as a computer on the surface. A front decorative member 3612 having a light-transmitting property and a part of the front decorative member 3612 disposed between the front decorative member 3612 and the front decorative base 3611. Corresponding frame-shaped light shielding member (not shown) having a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an underside in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface between the light shielding member and the front decoration base 3611 Front decoration board (not shown) and lamp attached to the lower front portion of the front decoration base 3611 and attached to the back box 3020 It includes a subplantar relay terminal plate 3615 that relays the connection between the decorative substrate and the driving motor in the back lower right framing unit 3250 in the dynamic substrate 3041 and a motor drive substrate 3042 and the back lower right direction unit 3200, the.

  The back lower direction production unit 3600 of this example can move the frame-shaped movable frame 3607 up and down via a pair of sliders 3602 by driving the back lower side drive motor 3605. In addition, the back bottom rendering unit 3600 can be illuminated and decorated near the upper side of the unit base 3601 by the back bottom back decoration board 3609 and the front decoration member 3612 simulating a keyboard by the back bottom front decoration board. Can be decorated with light emission.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back bottom effect unit 3600 includes a plate-like detection piece protruding leftward on the slider 3602 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the detection piece is detected by a slide detection sensor. The slide position (lifting position) of the movable frame 3607 can be detected via the slider 3602. When the movable frame 3607 is in the lowest position (normal position), the detection piece is detected by the slide detection sensor.

  In addition, the back lower direction production unit 3600 includes a pair of support pins 3602b that extend rearward and are spaced apart in the vertical direction so as to penetrate the guide portion 3601a of the unit base 3601 at the lower rear side of the slider 3602. A roller bush 3616 is provided which is rotatably inserted into the pin 3602b and can roll in the guide portion 3601a. The slider 3602 is smoothly guided by the guide portion 3601a.

  Further, the unit base 3601 in the lower back direction production unit 3600 is on the opposite side of the left and right sliders 3602 from the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608, and is perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the slider 3602 slides (horizontal direction). Are provided with a plurality of guide projections 3601b projecting forward and contacting the right side surface of the slider 3602 on both upper and lower sides across the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608. The guide projection 3601b of the unit base 3601 can regulate the movement of the slider 3602 away from the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608 by contacting the right side surface of the slider 3602. It is possible to prevent the meshing with the rack gear 3602a from becoming loose. Further, the guide protrusion 3601b of the unit base 3601 is configured such that the slider 3602 that is in contact with it slides. When the movable frame 3607 is stopped at the raised position by the generated sliding resistance, the backside drive motor 3605 The slider 3602 on the driven gear 3608 side where the driving force does not act can be made difficult to lower.

  In the normal state (normal position state), the lower back effect unit 3600 has a horizontal portion 3607b of the movable frame 3607 that is substantially the same height as the upper end of the front decorative member 3612, as shown. In this state, when the drive gear 3604 is rotated clockwise in front view by the lower back drive motor 3605, the pinion gear 3603 meshed with the drive gear 3604 is rotated counterclockwise and meshed with the pinion gear 3603. The rack gear 3602a slides the slider 3602 on the left side when viewed from the front. In the back extension unit 3600, the slider 3602 on the left side when viewed from the front is coupled to the slider 3602 on the right side when viewed from the front by a U-shaped movable frame 3607 in which the lower side is opened by a pair of vertical portions 3607a and 3607b. Therefore, when the left slider 3602 is lifted, the right slider 3602 is also lifted through the movable frame 3607 so that the entire movable frame 3607 is lifted.

  The movable frame 3607 can be raised to the rising end of the slider 3602. In the state where the movable frame 3607 is raised to the highest level (in the appearance position), the upper end of the movable frame 3607 is the cover member 2663 in the center accessory 2500. A part of the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 located on the upper side and disposed rearward from within the movable frame 3607 faces (see FIG. 161). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed only in a region corresponding to the frame of the movable frame 3607 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image is displayed to the player as if in the movable frame 3607. So that the illusion can be made.

  In the lower back effect unit 3600, when the movable frame 3607 is moved up and down, the driven gear 3608 meshed with the rack gear 3602a of the slider 3602 on the right side when viewed from the front is idled. Accordingly, the static friction resistance with respect to the right slider 2602 can be increased as compared with the case where the roller is caused to contact and idle, so that when the movable frame 3607 is stopped at a position other than the descending end, the right slider 3602 is stopped. The movable frame 3607 can be prevented from being inclined. Further, the right slider 3602 can be made difficult to fall without causing the driving force (resistance force) from the driving motor to act on the driven gear 3608 that meshes with the rack gear 3602a of the right slider 3602, so that the movable frame 3607 can be removed. A mechanism for raising and lowering can be simplified, an increase in cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, and space efficiency can be improved by eliminating an extra mechanism.

[2-13. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 152A is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 152B is a perspective view of the back effect unit as seen from the back. The back effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3020b at the center in the left-right direction in the front view in the back box 3020, and is arranged behind the back effect unit 3500. This back effect unit 3700 is mounted in a back box 3020 and has a box-shaped unit main body 3701 having a horizontally long rectangular front view and an open rear side, and a geometric decoration on the front surface disposed in the unit main body 3701. A formed lens member 3702 having translucency, and a back decorative board 3703 disposed near the rear end of the unit main body 3701 on the rear side of the lens member 3702 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. .

  The rear effect unit 3700 includes a blower 3710 that is attached to the left end of the unit body 3701 when viewed from the front and ventilates the back box 3020.

  As shown in the figure, the unit main body 3701 of the rear effect unit 3700 is inclined obliquely so that the front surface on the right side of the front view of the part to which the blower 3710 is attached recedes as it goes downward, and in a front-rear direction with a predetermined shape. A plurality of openings 3701a are formed therethrough, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface. The unit main body 3701 has a plurality of ventilation holes 3701b formed on the front surface of a part to which the blower 3710 is attached, and a notch 3701c formed on the upper portion so that the exhaust port 3710b of the blower 3710 faces.

  Further, the lens member 3702 of the back rendering unit 3700 is formed so as to be able to diffuse light from the LEDs of the back decorative substrate 3703 disposed on the rear side, and the opening 3701a of the unit main body 3701 is formed in the rear. In addition to closing from the side, a part of the front face faces the player side through the opening 3701a. Accordingly, the LED on the back decorative substrate 3703 emits light so that the opening 3701a of the unit main body 3701 can be illuminated and decorated through the lens member 3702.

  The blower 3710 in the back effect unit 3700 has a fan (sirocco fan) arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the front-rear direction inside, and an air inlet 3710 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed near the rotation center. In addition, an exhaust port 3710b is formed on the outer periphery, and the exhaust port 3710b is attached to the unit main body 3701 so as to face the notch 3701c of the unit main body 3701. The notch 3701c of the unit main body 3701 faces the vent 3020g opened on the upper surface of the outer peripheral wall of the back box 3020 when the back top production unit 3700 is attached to the back box 3020, and passes through the vent 3020g. The air in the back box 3020 can be discharged outside the back box 3020 and the temperature in the back box 3020 can be prevented from rising.

[2-14. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3020 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and can be attached to the back box 3020 via the fixed piece 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a box-shaped fixed frame 3020d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3020a in the back box 3020. The protruding two fixed pieces 1902 are inserted into the two fixed holes 3020e on the right side of the back side of the back box 3020, and the opposite fixed pieces 1902 are inserted into the insertion holes of the lock body 3051 in the lock mechanism 3050. The insertion opening of the lock body 3051 is closed by the lock slider 3052, so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be attached to the back box 3020.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 165), and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[2-15. Movable production on game board]
Next, the movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 163. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the lower right effect unit, FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the lower right effect unit following FIG. 153, and FIG. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back lower right production unit which continues. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle effect unit, and FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle effect unit following FIG. Further, FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle production unit in a state different from FIG. 156, and FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back middle production unit following FIG. . FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back left decorative body in the back left effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the lower back effect unit. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the game board facing the game window. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the front effect unit and the function display unit in the center accessory.

  In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 111 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side through the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized. Yes. Further, in a normal state, the game board 4 is arranged on the front right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 behind the center accessory 2500 and on the back right lower decoration unit 3250 of the cylindrical lower right decoration unit 3250. However, it can be visually recognized from the player side in a state where the axial center is slightly directed to the left front direction with respect to the vertical. Furthermore, in the normal state, the game board 4 is in a state in which the back left decorative body 3320 in the back left effect unit 3300 rises substantially vertically, and the left end of the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in front view. Thus, the right side portion is slightly visible from the player side.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 is in a state where the horizontally long rectangular logo lens 3520 in the back middle production unit 3500 faces the front side on the player side and extends substantially horizontally. The logo lens 3520 is visible from the player side so as to be in contact with the lower side of the center logo decoration member 2641 in the center accessory 2500. Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 has the movable frame 3607 of the lower back effect unit 3600 positioned below the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, so that it can hardly be seen from the player side. ing.

  In the normal state, the game board 4 is in a state in which the opening / closing opening 2701b of the table effect unit 2700 in the center accessory 2500 is closed by the opening / closing member 2706, and the opening / closing member 2706 has a front surface inside the opening / closing member 2706. The pattern (not shown) applied to is visible from the player side.

  The game board 4 of this example is a back right bottom slide drive motor so that the slide base 3230 that supports the back right bottom decoration unit 3250 slides in the right direction when viewed from the front in the back right bottom effect unit 3200 from a normal state. 3204 is driven, and the back lower right decoration drive motor 3232 is driven so that the back lower right decoration unit 3250 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Move to. In the state where the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is located at the first appearance position in the back lower right effect unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 153, the cylindrical decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is replaced by the decoration main body 3250b. The center member 2500 extends substantially horizontally at a position above the cover member 2663 that covers the stage 2510, and the lens member 3255 of the stay portion 3250a in the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is moved from the player side. It is in a visible state.

  In addition, in the state where the back lower right decoration unit 3250 of the back lower right rendering unit 3200 is in the first appearance position, the stay portion 3250a of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is positioned in front of the back right unit base 3401 in the back right rendering unit 3400. When viewed from the player side, the decoration main body 3250b appears to be located near the right end of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In other words, the player can be given an illusion that the decoration main body 3250b rotates around the base end side. In the state of the first appearance position, the cylindrical decoration body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 can be shown to the player as if floating at the front right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the decoration body 3250b. The attention of the player 3250b can be drawn by attracting the player's interest.

  In this state, the lower right lower decorative unit 3250 is slid leftward to the left end of the slide base 3230 together with the slide base 3230 by the lower right lower slide drive motor 3204, and the second lower right decorative unit 3250 appears second. Move to position. In the state of this second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 154, the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 in the back lower right effect unit 3200 is substantially in the left-right direction on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, a game Since it is in a state of being located at the approximate center of the region 1100, the cylindrical decorative body 3250b can be made very conspicuous from the player side so that the player can be focused on the decorative body 3250b. It has become.

  When the back lower right head driving motor provided in the decoration main body 3250b is driven in a state where the back right lower decoration unit 3250 of the back lower right rendering unit 3200 is positioned at the second appearance position, the left lower end of the decoration main body 3250b is driven. The positioned main body head decoration member 3267 rotates around the axis extending in the left-right direction. In this example, the axis of the cylindrical decorative main body 3250b is inclined so that the front end side (the main body head decoration member 3267 side) slightly faces the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The player can easily recognize that 3267 is rotating. Then, when the apex of the triangular relief in the main body head decoration member 3267 and the apex of the home base-like relief in the upper front decoration member 3262 coincide with each other, the rotation of the main body head decoration member 3267 is stopped, The back right lower head slide drive motor provided in the decoration main body 3250b is driven.

  As a result, the main body head decoration member 3267 and the upper front decoration member 3262 slide to the left, and the ends of the upper front decoration member 3261 and the lower front decoration member 3261 that are opposed to each other and formed in a ruptured manner are formed. The lens members 3264 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side while being separated from each other (see FIG. 155). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the bottom right decoration unit 3250 ruptures (explodes), and it seems that something good will happen by rupturing, and a sense of expectation for the game Can be raised.

  Before performing the movable effect using the back lower right effect unit, the back lower right decoration unit 3250 imitates a time bomb with respect to the player by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821. When it is made to recognize that there is, when the back lower right decoration unit 3250 starts moving, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the setting of the time bomb has started, and to make the player irritated. it can. By moving the back lower right decoration unit 3250 from the normal position to the first appearance position and then to the second appearance position, it is possible to produce an effect that the crisis is gradually approaching, and the player is further enhanced. It can be fun to be excited. Then, by rotating the main body head decoration member 3262, it becomes possible to recognize that the time limit of explosion is finally approaching, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension, and to the player's game Expectation can be raised.

  In addition, the game board 4 of this example simultaneously drives the back left lifting drive motor 3303 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right lifting drive motor 3403 of the back right rendering unit 3400, respectively. When the back middle stage production unit 3500 is lowered in a substantially parallel state to the lower end position (first lowering position) of the lift slider 3407, as shown in FIG. 156, the logo lens 3520 of the back middle stage production unit 3500 becomes the center role. The object 2500 is slightly away from the center logo decoration member 2641. As a result, the logo lens 3520 moves from the upper front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 toward the center, so that the logo lens 3520 becomes conspicuous from the player side, and the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced.

  If the back left elevating drive motor 3303 of the back left effect unit 3300 is driven and only the back left elevating slider 3307 is further lowered while the back middle effect unit 3500 is moved to the first lowered position, as shown in FIG. Further, the back middle production unit 3500 is inclined on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the logo lens 3520 with the logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be tilted so that the player can recognize that the balance is lost at first glance. It can be thought that it will change from a normal game state to a special game state, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  In this example, the unit base 3510 to which the logo lens 3520 in the back middle production unit 3500 is attached can be rotated around an axis extending in the longitudinal direction of the back middle production unit 3500. Then, with the back middle production unit 3500 moved from the normal position to the first lowered position, the unit base 3510 is rotated 90 ° so that the logo lens 3520 faces upward by the back middle rotation drive motor 3514. As shown in FIG. 158, instead of the logo lens 3520, three rotating lamp units 3550 bulging downward in a hemispherical shape and arranged in the left-right direction appear so as to be visible from the player side. As a result, the appearance of the back middle production unit 3500 can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it can be thought that there is something good. The expectation for a game can be raised.

  In addition, when the rotary lamp unit 3550 of the back middle production unit 3500 is made to appear and the rotary lamp unit 3550 is rotated and light-emitted, the player's interest can be more strongly attracted by the spinning light. It is possible to attract the interest of the present pachinko machine 1 strongly to the players, and to pay attention to the pachinko machine 1.

  The game board 4 of this example moves the back left raising / lowering slider 3307 in the back left effect unit 3300 to the second lowering position even when the rotary lamp unit 3550 of the back effect unit 3500 is made visible from the player side. As shown in FIG. 159, the rotary lamp unit 3550 can be tilted by moving the back left elevating slider 3307 from the first lowering position to the second lowering position side. The player can be presented with a moving effect with a different atmosphere from that of the logo lens 3520.

  In addition, the rotary lamp unit 3550 of the back middle production unit 3500 appears so that it can be seen from the player side, and the back left lift slider 3307 is moved to the first lowered position and the second lowered position with the rotary lamp unit 3550 emitting light. When moving up and down between, it is possible to perform a more dynamic light emitting effect with a sense of urgency, making the player excited and exciting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, the game board 4 drives the back left rotation drive motor 3312 of the back left effect unit 3300, thereby causing the back left decorative body 3320 imitating a motorcycle handle lever to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can appear on the left side of the front, and the appearance of the back left decorative body 3320 can increase the sense of expectation of the game by suggesting that the player has an opportunity.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the game board 4 can be moved up by the back frame driving motor 3605 in the back bottom effect unit 3600 to appear on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. . Then, when the predetermined effect image is displayed only in a region corresponding to the frame of the movable frame 3607 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the movable frame 3607 raised, it is as if the movable frame 3607 is displayed to the player. It is possible to make an illusion that the effect image is displayed in the inside, and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, you may make it combine suitably the movable production using the back lower right production unit 3200, and the movable production using the back middle production unit 3500, and, thereby, more various movable productions Can be presented to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to get tired of can be obtained.

  By the way, when the game board 4 of the present example is attached to the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the game window 101 of the door frame 5, as shown in FIG. The surface of the arranged right side decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300 has a rough rock-like appearance, and the surface of the left side decoration unit 240 has a sharp and artificial appearance. The game board 4 facing from the game window 101 has an attacker unit 2100 and a front side unit 2200 in which fine relief is formed on the surface in the vicinity of the rugged right side decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. In addition, the center front decoration unit 2620 of the center accessory 2500, the front effect unit 2700, and the like are arranged, and a transparent gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210) is passed in the vicinity of the artificially feeling left side unit 2400. An inner box effect unit 3100 is arranged in which rectangular main decoration portions 3110a are arranged in a concentric octagonal radial pattern.

  Thereby, the decoration of the atmosphere similar to the decoration of the game board 4 and the decoration of the door frame 5 is arranged with the same feeling, so the game board 4 and the door frame 5 are unified for the player. It is possible to make an illusion that it is of the designed design, and it is possible to prevent only one of the game board 4 and the door frame 5 from floating and give the player a sense of incongruity. Thus, it is possible to suppress the interest of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163, the game board 4 of this example includes a table effect unit 2700 that is arranged below the stage 2510 and on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 and imitates a fingerprint authentication system. This table effect unit 2700 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with respect to the player according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. When the effect image prompting fingerprint authentication is displayed, the object detection sensor 2702 can detect an object for a predetermined time, and the player places a finger on the front face of the detection opening 2701a of the front decorative member 2701 for a predetermined time or more. , The opening / closing member 2706 is moved by the front effect drive motor 2713 to open the opening / closing port 2701b, and the player can visually recognize the display by the 7-segment LED arranged on the rear side.

  In the table effect unit 2700, when the player places a finger on the front surface of the detection port 2701a, the display unit 1181 (functions) for displaying a special lottery result and the like arranged below the detection port 2701a. The display portion 2701d) is difficult to see by the player's hand. This makes it difficult to recognize the special lottery result displayed on the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, etc. of the function display unit 1180, so that the special lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to avoid knowing the contents of the special lottery results before being suggested, and to enjoy the effects for suggesting the special lottery results performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like.

[2-16. Lighting effect on game board]
Next, the light emission effect in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board shown together with the inner box decorative board. In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in the figure, the middle box effect unit 3100 arranged on the rear side through the transparent game panel 1200 (panel plate 1220) can be seen from the player side. In addition, the rear side in the game area 1100 is decorated by the front decorative member 3110 of the middle box effect unit 3100.

  The front decorative member 3110 in the middle box effect unit 3100 includes a plurality of main decorative portions 3110a (shaded portions in FIG. 164) arranged in a substantially concentric octagonal shape centered on the center of the game area 1100 and a main decorative portion. 3110a and a sub-decorative portion 3110b (shaded portion in FIG. 164) of a predetermined width disposed between each other, and each main ornament portion 3110a and the sub-decorative portion 3110b are disposed on the rear side. Each can be independently decorated with light emission.

  As a light emission effect using the middle box effect unit 3100, for example, the main decoration portion 3110a and the sub decoration portion 3110b emit light at the same time, thereby causing the entire rear side of the corresponding game area 1100 to emit light, The sub-decoration portion 3110b emits light in a light-off state, thereby causing the rear side of the game area 1100 to emit light like a spider web, or the sub-decoration portion 3110b is extinguished to cause the main decoration portion 3110a to emit light. The rear side of the area 1100 is made to emit light in a tile shape, the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b are made to emit light sequentially from the lower side to the upper side, and the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b are moved from the upper side to the lower side. The main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b are sequentially emitted from the center side to the outside of the game area 1100. The main decoration portion 3110a and the sub-decoration portion 3110b sequentially emit light from the outside of the game area 1100 toward the center, or the main decoration portion 3110a and the sub-decoration portion 3110b circulate around the center of the game area 1100. It can be made to emit light.

  Accordingly, by appropriately combining the light emission of the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and the plurality of sub decoration portions 3110b, the light emission decorations in the game area 1100 can be variously changed, so that various light emission effects can be presented. The pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired of, and the decoration effect in the game area 1100 can be enhanced by the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and sub-decoration portions 3110b so that the player can be entertained. It has become.

<Control that can be realized in the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, control that can be realized in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the description will be made including the configuration omitted in the above description. Further, in the following description, a part of the configuration is described independently of the above description, but the configuration of the following description is appropriately applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

[3. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 165, and FIG. 167 shows the payout control board, the CR unit and the frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 168 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 168 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 165, and FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 165, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 165, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100d, and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a. . The main control MPU 4100a, in addition to its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) and main control built-in RAM, in addition to a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and to prevent fraud These functions are also built in. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and this non-volatile RAM has a unique code for identifying an individual by a manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a (a code having only one in the world). ) Is stored in advance. The ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, and therefore cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  110 to 113, a first start port sensor 3102 (also referred to as an upper start port switch 3102) for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start port 2101 (also referred to as an upper start port 2101), a second start A second start port sensor 2127 (also referred to as a lower start port switch 2127) that detects a game ball that has entered the mouth 2102 (also referred to as the lower start port 2102), and a game ball that has entered the general winning port 2104 is generally detected. A detection signal from a winning mouth sensor 3101 (also referred to as a general winning mouth switch 3101) is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c and input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b. 110 to 113, a gate sensor 2751 (also referred to as a gate switch 2751) that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2750, and a general prize opening switch that detects a game ball that has entered the general prize opening 2201. 3101, a count sensor 2128 (also referred to as a count switch 2128) that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2103, and a magnetic detection that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 114 to detect fraud using a magnet. A detection signal from the sensor 3103 (also referred to as a magnetic detection switch 3103) is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the panel relay terminal plate 3040 attached to the game board 4, and via the main control I / O port 4100b. To the main control MPU 4100a.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, so that the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker are connected via the panel relay terminal plate 3040. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2124, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol memory via the main control I / O port 4100b via the panel relay terminal board 3040 and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, the gate switch 2751, and the count switch 2128. Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the prize opening switches 3101, 3101. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2750, so the upper start opening switch 3102, the lower start opening switch 2127, and the gate switch 2751 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is used as the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, and the gate switch 2751. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the winning ball opening 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2128. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2128. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switch 3101 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening switch 3101 is a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. are received in a serial manner. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, a main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 173). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 173). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 170) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls relating to payout, and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and also sends the ball by the ball feeding solenoid 585. 66, a launch control unit 4130 that performs control, an error LED display 860c that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 860c, And a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[3-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 166, a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout is a payout control MPU 4120a that is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. In addition, the payout control I / O port 4120b as an I / O device and the external watchdog timer 4120c for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4120c”) are described. ), A payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and the CR unit 6 CR unit for exchanging various signals It includes a circuit 4120F, a. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in addition to the built-in ROM. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various information (game information) related to games from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4120b, or clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e is input via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball apparatus 740, and the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 flow down. A detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball to be played is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the prize ball case inner board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and then paid out via the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 are first the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball case inner board 754. To the payout control input circuit 4120e, and to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as the payout control input circuit 4120e. To the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 22 is full is stored in the handle relay terminal plate 192, and It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball case inner board 754, and indicates the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the display unit 860c is output to the error LED display unit 860c via the payout control I / O port 4120b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to the payout control I / O port. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 860c is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860c include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotating body 74 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b that communicates with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball mesh with each other in the vicinity of the entrance thereof to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the numeral “3” is displayed, it indicates that “counting switch error” (specifically, Indicates that there is a problem with the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751, and when the number “5” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “retry error” (specifically, Notification that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank switch 550) Based on the detection signal, it is notified that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” ( That the electrical connection is cut off in any of the output control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, “in stock” (specifically, Is informing that the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending apparatus connection terminal board for the game ball etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is received by the payout control I / O port 4120b via the input / output circuit 4120f and input to the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and rents a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the apparatus connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 166, the launch control unit 4130 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

  A touch switch 516 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4130a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4130c. Yes. A signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 is first applied to the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. To the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d.

  Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d generates a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. In response to this, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e generates a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is received. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 170) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-2-3. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 167, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards. Between the board of the payout control board 4110 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and between the frequency display board 365 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal. The board and the board 869 are electrically connected to each other by wiring (harness). In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. These are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869.

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending switch 365a, which is a pushbutton switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the lending button 361 of the lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the rental unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The ball lending switch 365a is turned on when the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and this ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become so. The return switch 365b is turned on (turned on) when the return button 362 is pressed, and the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for designating the contents to be lit up and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. In accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, the one-digit segment indicator is sequentially lit, and the contents of the three-digit segment indicator luminescence remain unrented. It can be visually recognized through the display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  When the ball rental button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display board 365 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, the CR unit 6 receives the BRDY as a lending request signal. The game ball and the like lending apparatus connection terminal board 869 is configured to output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a). The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has been started or ended, to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  When the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). To be returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. And a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for performing sound control of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information for specifying the date, and time for specifying the hour, minute, second Real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 holding information, music and sound effects flowing from speaker 821 provided on main body frame 3 and speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on door frame 5 Etc., and a volume adjustment volume 1912 for adjusting the volume by rotating the knob portion.

[3-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 167, a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and will be described later. Various information (for example, a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined across the peripheral control unit steady process executed every time the V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is input. Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing schedule data to be performed and schedule data for defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc., and various information to be continued across the day (for example, a big hit gaming state has occurred) Information and special effects for managing history Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing lag management information, etc., and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally And). Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it can no longer hold. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided in the LED is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or a game Game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the board 4 is sent from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 3042. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to the door or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 The frame decoration drive amplifier board is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 from the serial I / O port for the motor via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. The door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door Or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 47, the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400 are shown. The detection signal from the pressure detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is converted into a door-side serial transmission circuit. To the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868.

  Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 3042, The serialized movable body detection data is inputted from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 3042 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[3-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. -It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Independent of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa and the input / output devices such as the port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to transfer data, the peripheral control ROM controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are connected to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 3042, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 A lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected directly, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED 286b having a significant meaning in games. Note that the lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than the LED 286b are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1912, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled. , 262, music and sound effects flow. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or a notification that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). Sound also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. It has a flowing mechanism, and adjusts the volume from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) by a program. It has to be able to bet. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in this embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when a player is cheating, , Maximum sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the volume developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be made more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, and that the screen will be more advantageous to the player and the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

[3-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various types of schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and a sound generation schedule for generating music, sound effects, and the like. Data, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or may be executed in various control program copy areas 4150cd of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some copies are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM 4165, and the acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information is currently set with luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. For example, from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first When June has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness of 80% is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Thus, the backlight brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the backlight is turned on, and December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Lights up.

[3-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
A peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. A copy of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the various control program copy area 4150cd for storing the dedicated data and the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy area 4150ce stored for use, backup non-management target work area 4150cf for storing, in a dedicated manner, information that is not the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 185) When it is an instruction to start each state effect (for example, an instruction to start an effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 165 is operated), it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” is a state in which the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since a V blank signal that informs the user is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Therefore, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later have the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is a 1 ms timer interrupt, as described later. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended (production information (1 ms) and The effect backup information (1 ms) described later is also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). Various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca. Includes various information (for example, in the operation unit 400) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like created based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[3-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command (see FIG. 185) from the main control board 4100 is stored in the RAM when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). Even when the clear effect start and each state effect start are instructed (for example, the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 165 is operated) is cleared to zero. Not. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[3-3-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, As shown in FIG. 168, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and a sound source built-in VDP for controlling drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( (Video Display Processor) 4160a, a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, serialized music, Audio data transmission I for transmitting sound effects and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 It includes a 4160c, a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, it is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control. The schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[3-3-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a generates sprite data by extracting character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. A VRAM for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also incorporated (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a displays the liquid crystal and the screen based on the input screen data. Character data is extracted from the sound control ROM 4160b, sprite data is created, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Output to the device 1900. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” is data for generating drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the built-in VRAM. .

  Further, when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the V blank signal is transmitted to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The data is output to the MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) and held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this method, drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. The sound source such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. Music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1912. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. . The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies up to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio data as audio data. The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c. In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set volume adjustment volume 1912 is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is actually set to the speaker 821 and the door provided on the main body frame 3. It amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. The sound data of the notification sound built into the track used and the volume of the notification sound built into the track used are adjusted. The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 set as the volume value. Are amplified up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the speaker and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data. Here, when the production sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs. A brief explanation of the control that plays the alarm sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the track in which this production sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5. That was amplified to a master volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization. That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is the sound generation schedule data described above. Is progressing according to. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far is adjusted to the sub-volume of the substrate volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and be adjusted, the sub-volume of the adjusted production sound is adjusted. Flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. Going on. As described above, when the production sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the fraud to the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows to notify the store clerk etc. of the action, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is heard from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. Although the flowing production sound is flowing in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period of time and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. When it stops flowing from 222 and 262, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period of time. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point.

[3-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b stores in advance various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds in addition to a very large amount of character data.

[3-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as left and right difference type serial data, for example, a positive signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[3-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be developed. As such effects, for example, if it is December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. Brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the above. Further, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information are first stored as information on the date, time, hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to perform ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a cold cathode tube type. Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the date / time and the hour / minute / second when the input date / time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Is set to the manufacturing date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes pachinko games such as brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or dark depending on the backlight luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the hall environment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. It may be too much. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 47, it becomes possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the backlight luminance to a predetermined luminance. Yes. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a desired luminance. it can. The adjusted desired luminance is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information. In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type, the secular change of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. Corrects the brightness drop caused by. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and hour / minute / second specifying the date. Luminance adjustment information for acquiring the time information to be specified, specifying the current date and time, and adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. For example, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the peripheral control ROM 4150b responds. When the correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information is acquired for the 75%. The backlight luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% to 80%, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on first. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10) is read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. ), And when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information obtained by adding 10% to the 75% is further added 85 The luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is%. The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[3-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1912 rotates the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1912 has a resistance value variable by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5. , 262, music and sound effects flow. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announces contents related to game effects (for example, announces that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, announces that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player, etc. .) Also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. The notification sound and notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on any at all, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled by a program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. So that the it can be adjusted to your. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in this embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when a player is cheating, , Maximum sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the volume developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be made more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, and that the screen will be more advantageous to the player and the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1912, the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the setting mode can be entered to adjust the volume of music or sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1912, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 1912 is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame 3 open from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, it is a hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1912. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a certain period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the unit 400, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time and is in a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the sound volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, or sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game. When the player who has played the game feels loud and adjusts the volume, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs the dial operation of the operation unit 400 this time. The unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[4. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. 170 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[4-1. Power supply board]
The power board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 86 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor improvement circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with this + 5.2V is a + 5.2V power supply line. The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 5.25V is a + 5.25V power supply line. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 12V is a + 12V power supply line. The + 24V creating circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 24V is the + 24V power supply line. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Note that the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1; An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are held by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. It has become so.

[4-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 170, and the main control board is passed through this payout control board 4110. 4100 is also supplied. The four voltages + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is provided via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 171 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 3041a of the lamp driving board 3041, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp driving circuit 3041a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 3042a of the motor drive board 3042, and a drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 3042a to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is a backlight. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Among the three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a to various decoration substrates of the door frame 5.

[4-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. Is transmitted to the backlight power supply 1900b of the frame, and is also transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and various types of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is transmitted to decorative boards.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4120 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

  Thus, by providing the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main body frame 3 side, it is not necessary to mount the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b every time the game board 4 is manufactured. It can contribute to reduction.

  Here, in this embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 includes the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. As described above, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110. In other words, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the main body frame 3 side are closest to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side as a transmission path. It is supplied via a payout control board 4110 provided on the third side. As a result, compared to the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, it is possible to monitor the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure in a relationship closer to the main control board 4100 as a transmission path. By shortening the transmission path for transmitting the notice signal to the main control board 4100, it is possible to contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Also, the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line is monitored by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power supply lines of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure. In addition, in recent pachinko machines, by providing an extremely large number of electrical decorations on door frames and game boards, etc., it provides players with a gorgeous production and powerful and attractive production. It tends to increase. Along with this, power consumption has increased, and opportunities for improving power supply boards have increased. On the other hand, the payout control board is a board that exclusively performs a game ball payout operation and the like, and therefore, there is very little opportunity to remake without significant system improvements related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the reasons described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided with the configuration provided in the power supply board 851, but the configuration provided in the payout control board 4110 is used.

[4-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100c and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

[4-2-3. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the firing power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4130d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

  As described above, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, whereas + 5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Yes. + 5.2V and + 5.25V are control reference voltages for each control board, but when electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness), the total length of wiring, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 having a short power path, +5.2 V is supplied from the power board 851 because the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated small. In contrast to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than that of the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. The lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3042, and the various decorative boards on the door frame side subordinate to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, etc. Since the voltage drop caused by the wiring (voltage drop) can not be ignored, it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 + 5.2V is higher voltages + 5.25V is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[5. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165 will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 173 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 170 will be described, and then the power source, main control system reset IC, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, main control I / O port created by the main control board 4100 will be described. Various input / output signals such as 4100b and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 172, the main control board 4100 has a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit in addition to the main control MPU 4100a, the main control I / O port 4100b, and the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. A main control crystal oscillator MX0 (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[5-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 172, the main control filter circuit 4100g mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5.2V is applied to the first terminal from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 170, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground. + 5.2V from which the noise component is removed from the terminal No. is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC component folded on voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

  + 5.2V output from the third terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) that are grounded. It has become. The smoothed + 5.2V is the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control I / O port 4100b. Applied to the VCC terminal or the like, which is the power source terminal.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor MC3, the VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor MC4, and the VDD terminal And + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is grounded to the ground.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to a capacitor MC5 grounded. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 via the resistor MR0. Connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thereby, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is changed to the main VBB. Is supplied to the main control board 4100, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, but the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM The memory contents are held by applying the main VBB.

[5-2. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 172, + 5.2V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor MC6, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC6. . Specifically, when + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC7 grounded and grounded (the capacitor MC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value. The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC8, and + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[5-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 172, + 5.2V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to a capacitor MC9 that is grounded and grounded, and + 5.2V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5.2 V is also input to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal that are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5.2V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The main control MPU 4100a to which this clock signal is input outputs a clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and a 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal is input. The terminal between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[5-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c receives detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3101 and 3101, the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2128, and the gate switch 2751 shown in FIG. In addition, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 170 are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and a circuit to which the power failure warning signal is input will be described. .

[5-4-1. Circuit to which detection signal from RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 172, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR4. Connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR4, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the resistor MR5 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 and electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The 1st and 2nd pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded and the 4th pin is electrically connected to the 3rd pin. Thereby, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the third pin and the fourth pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the third pin And the 4th pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 1st pin and the 2nd pin.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. Is applied to the transistor MTR0, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Is done.

[5-4-2. Circuit where power failure warning signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 172, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. Connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR8, the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is also electrically connected to a resistor MR9 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR10 and electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to + 12V by a pull-up resistor MR7. Thus, when the power failure warning signal is not input, the pull-up resistor MR7 pulls it up to + 12V side, while when the power failure warning signal is input, it is pulled down to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit. When no power failure warning signal is input, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. When applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the power failure warning signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR1 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR10, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is applied to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Entered.

  The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, whereas the power failure notice signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100 while the power failure warning signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is + 5.2V. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a high voltage. As a result, the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3101, the upper start opening switch 3102 and the lower start opening switch 2127 input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up in the same manner as the detection signals from the RAM clear switch 4100e. Detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2128, the general winning opening switch 3101, and the gate switch 2751, which is input to the + 5.2V side by the resistor and input via the panel relay terminal plate 3040 shown in FIG. The signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure warning signal from the payout control board 4110.

[5-5. Various input / output signals such as main control I / O port
Next, various input / output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

  Serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 165 is input to the RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, as a payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output serial data to be transmitted to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and from the TXB terminal to FIG. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown is output as a main circumference serial data transmission signal.

  To the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b, the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the completion of normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal is the main control input. For example, the upper start port switch 3102 shown in FIG. 165 is input to the other input pins of the input port PA and the input pins of the ports set as the input ports among the ports PB to PE, which are input via the circuit 4100c. Detection signals from various switches such as are input via the main control input circuit 4100c. Various detection signals input to the main control I / O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payer serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I / O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, from the output pins of the ports set as the output ports among the ports PB to PE, for example, a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2121 shown in FIG. 165 is sent via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. Or a drive signal is output to various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG.

[5-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than + 5.2V which is the control reference voltage.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173, the main control board 4100 mainly includes a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed.

  An electrolytic capacitor in which + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is grounded to the ground. It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of MC20 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The charged electric charge can be continuously applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, was charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 172 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurred. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by this applied + 5.2V is at least the main control MPU 4100a built-in. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae can be transmitted. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V. That is, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete the transmission of the main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit. Even if a main peripheral serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 by the voltage + 5.2V, a main peripheral serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI by the + 12V is supplied from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20. Cannot output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal with logic HI by + 12V. Yes. This ensures that the peripheral control board 4140 receives the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data, without being interrupted. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 172 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. Electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR21, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is also electrically connected to the resistor MR22 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the negative terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 that is grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 by a pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. .2V is pulled up to the side and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal. Thus, as described above, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous interruption. Can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is + 5.2V. When power or instantaneous interruption occurs, by applying +5.2 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is at least The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is transmitted. Data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being cut off or being lost.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main serial data whose logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. When Since the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V from the pull-up resistor MR20 and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to is grounded is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, + 5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, the reference control voltage generated by the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 is +5. There is a power failure or a momentary power failure between the + 5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and the + 12V to be applied via the diode M20, that is, + 12V created by the + 12V creation circuit 851f is applied as the communication control voltage. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and the communication control voltage are reduced. In other words, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 having the + 5.2V power supply line and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the + 5.2V power supply line decreases due to the electrical connection of the terminals to each other in parallel, the main control filter that is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the reference control voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit unit 4100g, the state where the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistor MR20 and the resistor MR21 are maintained. , MR22, and + 12V for the interface circuit comprised of transistor MTR20 + 12V applied to the source line is applied as a communication control voltage to the anode terminal of the diode M20, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 which is the second auxiliary power supply are electrically connected in parallel. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication control voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD20 decreases, communication from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 that is the second auxiliary power supply By applying the control voltage, the state where the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all sent as peripheral peripheral serial data via the interface circuit. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without being broken or missing.

[6. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. 174 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 175 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of a payout control unit, FIG. 176 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 177 is a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 178 is a circuit diagram showing a launch control input circuit. FIG. 179 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, and then to the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120, the launch control unit 4130, various input / output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784. Various output signals will be described.

[6-1. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 170, the payout control board 4110 is supplied with + 24V, + 12V, and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and + 24V and + 12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b monitors + 24V and + 12V power outage or signs of instantaneous power failure, and detects a power outage or instantaneous power outage sign as a power outage notice signal as a power outage notice of the payout control unit 4120. In addition, the data is output to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and + 12V power failure or power failure monitoring.

[6-1-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 174, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D-type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (in this embodiment, 2SC1815). Yes.

  + 5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, via a resistor PR20, and a current input to the REF terminal is applied to the resistor PR20. Limited by. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC20 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator PIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. The remaining one (PIC21B) is used to compare the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref, the + 12V monitor voltage V2 is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. Yes. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21, is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC21 connected to the ground. Further, + 5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC22 grounded.

[6-1-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 24V blackout or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC21A of the comparator PIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 174, + 24V is distributed in voltage according to the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC 21A (the capacitor PC23 is It also serves as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 become a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when + 24V is blacked out or momentarily stopped, and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above. Pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor The PC 24 also serves as a low-pass filter). Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is larger than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 166 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type. Becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

[6-1-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V blackout or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC21B of the comparator PIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 174, the voltage of + 12V is distributed according to the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC21B (the capacitor PC25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 are set to a power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) preset when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above. The voltage is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and its logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 connected to the ground and input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 166 from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type. The ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 that is grounded and grounded, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is also electrically connected to the resistor PR27 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 172 via a wiring (harness). As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is raised to the + 12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. In this way, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I / O port 4100b pay out between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4100b. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the power outage notice is performed by the power outage notice signal 1 which is an ON / OFF signal using the control reference voltage + 5.2V, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the ON / OFF using + 12V that is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V is used. A power failure notice is given by a power failure notice signal which is an OFF signal.

  In addition, a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 166 via the payout control I / O port 4210b. It is like that. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the payout control I / O port 4210b. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic being LOW at the PR terminal. Note that the 1D terminal as the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal as the ground terminal are grounded. The negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[6-2. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 175, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded, and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5.2V is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded with the ground (GND).

  The + 5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2, which are grounded. The smoothed + 5.2V is a Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a payout control I / O port. The voltage is applied to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of 4120b.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCC terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor PC4. And + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, is grounded to the ground.

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and is also electrically connected to a capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 via the resistor PR0. Connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. Thereby, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

[6-3. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIGS. 175 to 177, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I / O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f. In addition, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) is mainly configured as a peripheral circuit. Here, the external WDT 4120c will be described first, followed by a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f, various input / output signals such as a main control I / O port, Various input / output signals such as the payout control I / O port will be described.

[6-3-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
As shown in FIG. 175, + 5.2V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT 4120c resets the payout control MPU 4120a and has a built-in watchdog timer. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage of +5.2 V reaches a threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2 V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal or the payout control I / O from the payout control MPU 4120 a. If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC6, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR1 pulled up to the + 5.2V side. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In the present embodiment, a time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 interrupt timers (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal release time.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC7 (the capacitor PC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is greater than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the / O port 4120b is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

  The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. The logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. If the external WDT clear signal is not released as it is, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is smaller than the threshold value or input to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is not released while the external WDT clear signal is ON within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor PC9 is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded with the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[6-3-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 175, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC10, and + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5.2V is also input to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the CLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are input.

[6-3-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 175, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a drive PIC1. This drive PIC1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when a discharge motor drive signal is input to the base terminal and the emitter terminal is grounded, an excitation signal is output from the corresponding collector terminal. A drive pulse is output.

  As shown in FIG. 175, + 24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 via the Zener diode PZD0. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to + 24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. + 24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as a drive power source for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. Drive pulses as excitation signals from the collector terminals that perform the respective phases (/ B-phase, B-phase, A-phase, / A Phase). These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When the counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected.

[6-3-4. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, the error release switch 860a, and the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 166 are input. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described. Subsequently, a circuit to which a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input. A circuit to which a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b is input will be described.

[6-3-4 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 176, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is applied to one end of the door frame opening switch 618 via the payout control board 4110. The resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31 are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30. Between the connection of the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31, a resistor PR32 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR33 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via the resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via the resistor PR36.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR35, the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR37 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR31 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 changes, and this signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a door opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a resistor PR39 grounded to the ground in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR36. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded to ground, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165, and the transistor PTR32 is open with the emitter terminal grounded. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR32 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the circuit repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35 and PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is This is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a door opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by being turned on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit, and comprises resistors PR36 and PR39 and a transistor PTR32. This circuit is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON. Therefore, the + 12V supplied through the door frame opening switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is absorbed. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned ON, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned ON. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltages applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the final-stage switch circuit are also brought to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned OFF, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that + 12V is blocked by the door frame opening switch 618 and the base of the transistor PTR30 constituting the first stage switch circuit When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34, so this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the final-stage switch circuit. Is applied to the transistors PTR31 and PTR32, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled down to the ground side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is output. The frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is reduced to the main control board 4100 by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100.

  Thus, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. A door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the door frame 5 is When closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned off and the last-stage switch circuit is both turned on, and the door frame whose logic is LOW. An opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[6-3-4 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, so that the body frame 3 is connected to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 176, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is applied to one end of the main body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the main body frame opening switch 619 is The resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41 are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33. Between the connection of the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41, a resistor PR42 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR43 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via the resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 via the resistor PR46.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR47 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR34 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a main body frame opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46, in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR46. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 and is also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR35 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. This frame opening information output signal is output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 as well as from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and is output by the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. An OR circuit is configured.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR40 and PR42 and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a main body frame opening switch 619 when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the circuit repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is This is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a main body frame opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit. From the resistors PR46 and PR49 and the transistor PTR35 The configured circuit is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that + 12V supplied through the main body frame opening switch 619 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is absorbed. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR33 is turned ON, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned ON. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltages applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the final-stage switch circuit are also brought to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned OFF, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the body frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so + 12V is blocked by the main body frame opening switch 619 and the base of the transistor PTR33 constituting the first stage switch circuit is formed. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44, so this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the final-stage switch circuit. Is applied to the transistors PTR34 and PTR35, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled down to the ground side and the body frame open signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 The frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is reduced to the main control board 4100 by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100.

  Thus, in a state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the first stage switch circuit is turned on and both the last stage switch circuits are turned off. A body frame release signal whose logic is HI is output to an input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame release information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the body frame 3 is In the state of being closed by the outer frame 2, when the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, the first-stage switch circuit is turned OFF and the final-stage switch circuit is turned ON, and the main body frame whose logic is LOW. An opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive). Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. It becomes a state. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 5 can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′, body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The main body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) in a state where the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) in a state where the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected. Is in a state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 even when it is turned off (cut). Thus, the door frame opening switch 618
Even if a normally open switch is used as the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at disconnection, and the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 A state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and a state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined.

[6-3-4 (c). Circuit to which detection signal from error release switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 176, the first pin as the output pin of the error release switch 860a is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. The input pin PA0 is electrically connected. The first pin of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the second pin, and the third and fourth pins are grounded. Thus, when the error release switch 860a is not operated, the 1st pin and the 2nd pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error release switch 860a is operated, the 1st pin And the 2nd pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 3rd pin and the 4th pin.

  The error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC32 grounded (the capacitor PC32 It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR50 is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[6-3-4 (d). Circuit where detection signal from ball removal switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 176, the first pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 860b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. The input pin PA1 is electrically connected. The 1st pin of the ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to the 2nd pin, and the 3rd and 4th pins are grounded. Thus, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the first pin and the second pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the first pin And the second pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the third and fourth pins.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, the ball removal switch 860b is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor PC33 grounded to ground (the capacitor PC33 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, a ball removal detection signal that is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR51 and has a logic level HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, a ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[6-3-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 167 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 177, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61, and also the base of the transistor PTR61 via the resistor PR62. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR61, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is also electrically connected to a pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the + 5.2V side.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR61, the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR64 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR65 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR60 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR62, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR66 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR67 and is electrically connected to a firing timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 changes, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. The voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, whereby the transistor PTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled to the ground side and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 60 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is applied to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Entered.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is lowered to the ground side, whereby the transistor The PTR 61 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. This switch circuit constitutes a part of an input circuit of a launch control input circuit 4130a described later.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b are set in advance. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic is HI by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 being pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69 is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 61 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 62 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b are previously set. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on, The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 62 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 175 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is It is designed to turn off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. And is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON. Therefore, the EXS whose logic is LOW because the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 63 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is Since the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 by the pull-up resistor PR74, the EXS whose logic is HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 in order to turn it off. Thus, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 175 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is It is designed to turn off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63. A ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled down to the ground side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is In order to turn OFF, PRDY whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77 and the logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[6-3-6. Various input / output signals of payout control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port 4120b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via the data bus.

  As shown in FIG. 175, serial data from the main control board 4100 is input to the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, as a main payout serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  An error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0 to each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ball removal from the ball removal switch 860b is input to the input pin PA1. A detection signal is input, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 is transmitted to the input pin PA2 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payment serial data reception signal, and the input pin PA3 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Power failure notice signal 1 is input. In addition, a predetermined input pin of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b has a BRQ signal as a payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6 and a rental request from the CR unit 6. Various signals from the CR unit 6 such as a BRDY signal that is a signal, a CR connection signal 1 indicating whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, and a door from the door frame opening switch 618 In addition to the frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal from the main body frame opening switch 619, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input.

  On the other hand, each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b outputs an EXS signal from the output pin PB0 indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and from the output pin PB1. A PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a ball is possible or impossible is output, and the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. Is output from the output pin PB3, and the payer ACK signal is transmitted from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. Has been. A payout motor drive signal is output from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The drive signal of the device 860c is output.

[6-4. Circuit of launch control unit]
Next, the firing control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 166, the firing control unit 4130 includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 178, and a detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[6-4-1. Launch control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the launch control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110 receives a detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and a detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 of the handle device 500. This is input via the board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body 500 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 51, and the firing stop switch 518 is a single button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. It is detected whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will by operating 520. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and then a circuit to which a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 will be input.

[6-4-1a. Circuit to which detection signal from touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 178, +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 is applied to one end of the touch switch 516 via the resistor PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR81, the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to a resistor PR82 grounded to the ground and a capacitor PC80 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR80 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input as a touch detection signal to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR81 and PR82 and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the touch switch 516. When the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the handle relay board When the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, the transistor PTR80 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, turning off the transistor PTR80 and turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[6-4-1b. Circuit to which detection signal from launch stop switch is input
As shown in FIG. 178, one end of the firing stop switch 518 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 170 via the resistor PR84 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the dispensing control board 4110. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR85, the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to a resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and a capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR81 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the single button 520 is not operated. When the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, the transistor PTR81 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the single button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, turning off the transistor PTR81 and turning off the switch circuit. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  Note that the switch circuit including the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 177 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Is also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[6-5. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the dispensing control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the dispensing control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[6-5-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the payout control board 4110 sends a payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, power failure notice signal, frame opening information output information, etc. to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, the payout control board 4110 has a main hit serial data reception signal, a main payout ACK signal, a RAM clear signal, a big hit information output signal such as a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, and a probability variation. Game information signals relating to games such as a medium information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are input from the main control board 4100.

[6-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. Number information output signal, through the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special A game information signal such as a symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784.

  The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and monitors the game of the player. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose. However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[7. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. 180 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 181 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 182 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. 183 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described.

[7-1. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 180, the driving system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball of the firing control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. The power supply solenoid drive circuit 4130e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  As described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the launch control input circuit 4130a is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the CR control unit 4110a. A touch switch 516 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body is output as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4130c by inputting a signal indicating that power (AC24V) is being supplied. When a detection signal from the player is input, it is output as a touch detection signal to the launch timing circuit 4130c and detected from the launch stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. When the signal is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The launch timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, the launch timing circuit 4130c says that the CR unit 6 is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The first case, the second case that the touch detection signal tells the front 506 of the rotating handle body that no palm or finger is touching, the launch stop detection signal forcibly stops the launch of the game ball When any one of the third cases of transmission is applicable, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4130c receives the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b. When the launching solenoid 654 permits the launch of the game ball, 100 game balls per minute are shown in FIG. The firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 5 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and the ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number (5 times in this embodiment). Is output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 by a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and the DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter referred to as “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. + 5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by the resistor PR90. The current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC90 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC90 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 180, the amplifier circuit 4130db amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da by a factor of 2, and creates DC + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). Then, the power is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the amplifier circuit 4130db mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC91. The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, and the operational amplifier PIC91. And the other end of the resistor PR92 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. As described above, the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is + 5.0V obtained by doubling + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, as described above, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The electric power is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC91 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC91 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC92 connected to the ground.

  Referring back to FIG. 180, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, which includes a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, and the first fixed terminal is +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4130db. , And the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded. When the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates, and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is changed to the front of the rotary handle main body 506. Is divided according to the rotational operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, and the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is supplied to resistors PR93 and PR94 (described later in FIG. 181 (b)) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The voltage that is divided by the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As described above, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded through the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 181 (b). The ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the dispensing control board 4110 Applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage in the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC93. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC94 connected to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (−terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 is the non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR94 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR93. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, is simply output as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The voltage of the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage as a voltage in the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92, that is, a voltage in the order of millivolts is output as a firing intensity target voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. To do. The operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage of the resistance PR94 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94, as it is, but the resistance in the millivolt order divided by the resistances PR93 and PR94. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR94 takes over and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC95 connected to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 180, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through the resistor PR101, one end of which is grounded, so that the voltage in the millivolt order that the resistor PR101 takes is used as a firing control voltage. Applied to 4130 dc. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage which is a voltage in the order of millivolts described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are resistance from the voltage in the order of volts to the voltage in the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltage that is handled by PR101 and PR94. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage in the millivolt order. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launcher 650 and between the board equipment of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via wiring (harness). Therefore, the wiring (harness) is easily affected by noise, and the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by using a voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130 dd. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is larger than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130 dd as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4130dd receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc every time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input, A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is input to the switching circuit 4130 dd, the switching circuit 4130 dd generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0. On the other hand, when an OFF signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off while flowing through the firing solenoid 654. That is, the switching circuit 4130 dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the voltage that is divided by the resistor PR101 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and OFF. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd blocks the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd. As described above, 4130dd passes the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the switching circuit 4130 dd generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0 into the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4130 dd controls the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc to self-oscillate to flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed value of the potentiometer 512. The voltage is applied to the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal. That is, the voltage that the resistor PR100 is responsible for is applied to the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is output to the switching circuit 4130 dd, the switching circuit 4130 dd combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). 1) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 can jump over the firing rail 660 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1. Since the game area 1100 cannot be reached, it is received and collected as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In addition, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining a minimum firing intensity that matches the original rotational position when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is at the original rotational position. The game balls launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 along the firing rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 are received and collected at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located as a foul ball at the lower part of the foul space 626. It has become so. As a result, when the player starts to rotate the front of the rotary handle body 506, even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotary handle body 506 to increase the firing strength, all the game balls Can jump over the firing rail 660, so that it is possible to avoid the game balls from colliding with each other on the firing rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the launch solenoid 654, the player rotates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, so that the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is removed from the outer rail. It is possible to cause the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball to jump out to the game area 1100 by colliding with the previously launched game ball descending along 1111, and temporarily enter the game area 1100. Even if it cannot be ejected, it is received and collected at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball. In other words, even if the player cannot rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the firing strength, the launching ball is given a launch strength enough to jump over the launch rail 660. Do not collide on the firing rail 660 to cause clogging. Also, when the player operates the front 506 of the rotary handle to increase the firing strength, the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is lowered along the outer rail 1111 to the previously launched game ball. The foul ball of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the bottom of the foul space 626 as a foul ball even if the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball cannot be caused to jump into the game area 1100 by colliding. Since all are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player can rotate the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength, thereby allowing the game ball to jump out to the game area 1100 without causing a ball clogging. . In other words, the game ball launched this time is collided with the previously launched game ball descending along the outer inner rail 1111, and the game ball launched this time is jumped to the game area 1100 together with the previously launched game ball. Even if the player may not be able to play the game, it may cause the player to feel uncomfortable, and the player can play the game ball without causing clogging by rotating the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength. Since it can be made to jump out to the area | region 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, the player's discomfort due to the ball clogging at the start of the rotation operation of the front 506 of the rotary handle body can be eliminated.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 in the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is + 2.5V which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db and is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is also maintained at the same rotational position. When this is done, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by flowing the merged current to the launch solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launcher 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

  In addition, the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, in addition to heat due to polishing of game balls, heat due to collision and friction between game balls, the temperature in the pachinko island facility is extremely high due to heat from the power board of the pachinko machine and various illuminations, etc. . In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to the temperature is suppressed, so that the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd. In other words, when the rotation position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is the same rotation position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[7-2. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 182 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[7-3. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a fixed rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 180, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c permits the launching solenoid 654 to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set to be ejected, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms as shown in FIG. 183 (a).

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC in the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  If the firing reference circuit T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the limit rotational position, the results are shown in FIGS. 183 (b) and (c). As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing reference circuit T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. 183 (b), As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 183, but is shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” in the milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[7-4. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 180 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4130e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

[8. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 187. FIG. 184 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 185 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 185 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 185, and FIG. 187 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3101 and 3101, the upper starting opening switch 3102, the lower starting opening switch 2127, and the count switch 2128 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301 or When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out a game ball as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 184 (a). In addition, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as balls for lending) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 184 (b), paying out from the main control board 4100 Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and the self check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, statuses indicating the types of commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized production, special figure 2 synchronized production related, jackpot related, power-on, general drawing synchronized production related, ordinary electric role production related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[8-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the upper start switch 3102 shown in FIG. 165, and, as shown in FIG. 185, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands with names of special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the result of the lottery regarding the first special symbol (for example, the deviation and the small The special figure 1 tuning production end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning production, and the change is made. The hour state designation command is used to indicate the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2127 shown in FIG. 165, and as shown in FIG. 185, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the lower special symbol display 1186, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the result of the lottery regarding the second special design (for example, the deviation and the small The distinction between winning and jackpots, and the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot) are designated, and the end of the special figure 2 synchronized effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronized effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 185, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the opening of the big winning opening 1 for the 1st to 15th rounds (the attack unit 2100 shown in FIG. 110). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2103 is being opened or the opening is started, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2100) 2103 during the closing of the round or the start of closing), the winning prize 1 count display command has been detected by the count switch 2128 shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103), and the jackpot ending command Is intended to instruct the Ingu start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or opening of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the small switch is detected by the count switch 2128 when a game ball that has entered the big winning slot 2103 is detected during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2128 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 185, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 165 is operated). ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or instantaneous power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2751 shown in FIG. 165, and, as shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2105 shown in FIG. 110 that are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2121 shown in FIG. 165. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2121). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2105 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2121). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 186, the notification display category includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (while the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) When the count switch 2128 detects), an instruction to start a prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, the count switch 2128, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short-circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3103 shown in FIG. 165.

  In addition, the door opening command is generated by the main body frame 3 based on detection signals (opening signals) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is open or when the door frame 5 is open with respect to the main body frame 3, the door open command is instructed. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When it is in a state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, the count switch 2128, etc. , Which is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3103 is detected, and the door opening command is detected when the door opening is detected (door frame opening). Based on detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3), and the door closing command is detected when the door is closed ( Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Sent if it is in a state). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 186, the status display section includes commands named “frame state 1”, “error cancellation navigation”, and “frame state 2”. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 186, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 186, the test-related section is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 3041, the motor driving board 3042, and the like shown in FIG. 168). Inspecting various substrates such as the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or instantaneous power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 186, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3102, Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2127, it instructs to start the production when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102. The change shortening operation end designation command The command for instructing state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed. The high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol. 1 to 0-4 pieces (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 110 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to transmit 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold commands (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 110). The special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the special symbol variation display, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0-4. 110 (the number of balls that have not yet been used for variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after passing through the gate portion 2750 shown in FIG. 110). Yes, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is used to pre-read the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol change display on the function display board 1191 to display the special symbol 1 hold. The special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command instructs the start of the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185. In this case, prior to use for the special symbol variation display, the pre-reading effect is instructed to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3102 or the lower start opening switch 21) (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2127), the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 30, and the upper left shown in FIG. The main part 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 85 are transmitted mainly to notify the user of the fact, and the change shortening operation end designation command is the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of changes. The high probability end designation command is sent at the time (after the outage stop period elapses), and the stop period ends after the change is confirmed by digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times” The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the upper special symbol display on the function display board 1191). In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the change display of the special symbol in 1185, when the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the upper special symbol indicator The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of the special symbol 2 operation on-holding balls changes (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186 on the function display board 1191, a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the number of reserves increases. Or when the number of reserved symbols is reduced using the special symbol display 1186 on the lower special symbol display 1186 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced) (In the state where the game ball passes through the gate portion 2750 and there is a reserved number which is not yet used for the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, the game ball further passes through the gate portion 2750. The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is sent to the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command when the reserved number increases or when the normal symbol display 1189 uses the normal symbol display 1189 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Sent when the number of symbols 1 actuated reserve ball increases (when the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of reserves increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command increases the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserve balls Sent at the time of addition (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the holding number increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3102 or from the lower start opening switch 2127. (When a game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 based on the detection signal), the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 are notified mainly by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 168 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the side speakers 130 and 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 are used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent acts in addition to the voice notification. It is of the specification to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the voice is transmitted from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Some specifications do not report.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 187, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection are prepared in 50 or more stocks. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when full, bit 1 (B2) is set to 1 when there are 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, there are provided a sphere, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 166 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 188, and FIG. 190 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value update type counter (range closer to the maximum value side), and FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value update type counter (minimum). The range is closer to the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and an initial value for determining the big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for use in determining whether or not to generate reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state does not occur, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display 1186 and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the big hit gaming state A jackpot symbol for use in determining the jackpot symbol to be derived and displayed, and a jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot symbol Random number for determining the initial value for use, random number for small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated, A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol for use in determining an initial value for the random number for a small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, for determining the normal symbol per random number for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece 2105 shown in FIG. 119, and for determining the initial value of the random symbol for normal symbol determination. Random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbols to be used, random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of ordinary symbols that are variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 to the maximum value 32767 as the minimum value). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing by 1 each time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Further, the above-described random number for determining per ordinary symbol and the random number for determining initial value for determining per normal symbol are the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 165 is operated when the power is turned on, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. In FIG. 165, the check sum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the stored checksum value (sum value) at power-off The determination initial value determination random number is a fixed value of a counter that the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 165 extracts an ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the range is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set to the initial value determining random number for determining the big hit is derived using the ID code, and the ID that is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored Thus, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a big hit. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. That is, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is not useful at all on the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko gaming machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if it is aimed at starting winnings such as causing a momentary power outage at every predetermined interval and entering a game ball into the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
As shown in FIG. 219, the initial value update type counter, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, as a range of the jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination range), when a value 10 to a value 209 is set for a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set for a high probability, FIG. As shown in the figure, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range in which the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value is closer to the minimum value side in either the low probability or the high probability. Will be set. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is obtained by some method, and the game ball is started upward by irradiating the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the values of the jackpot determination value range (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value as shown in FIGS. 219 and 220. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. The Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

  Following step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 165 has been operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and games relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” means not only the state where the power is turned off but also the state where the power is turned on, the state where the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and the detection that a high frequency has been applied. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). The big hit determination initial value determination random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number described above is used when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information or the sum value does not match. Or, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and a jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code The initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value is always executed from the fixed numerical value range of the counter to be updated, and this fixed value is set.

  Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 186 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, interrupt permission is set. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is provided as a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. It is input from. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S48, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the start opening solenoid 2121, the attacker solenoid 2124, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display 1187 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, a value 1 is set in the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control timer interruption process is repeated every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 188 and 189.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 190 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). By clearing the interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3101 and 3101 shown in FIG. 165 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 110, and the big winning opening shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count switch 2128 shown in FIG. 165 for detecting a game ball entered into the 2103, an upper start port switch shown in FIG. 165 for detecting a game ball entered into the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 1102, a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2127 shown in FIG. 165 for detecting a game ball entering the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 110, and a gate part 2750 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2751 shown in FIG. 165 for detecting a game ball, and a magnetic detection switch for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. 165 165, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 for notifying that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. And stored as input information in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3102 for detecting a game ball entering the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2127 for detecting a game ball entering the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 186 shown in FIG. 186 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3102, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2127, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3101 and 3101 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2128 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103. , A detection signal from an upper start switch 3102 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2127 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2751 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2750 is read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Each time it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3101 and 3101, the count switch 2128, the upper start port switch 3102, the lower start port switch 2127, and the gate switch 2751 are passed from the first to the third time. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3101 and 3101, the count switch 2128, the upper starting opening switch 3102, the lower starting opening switch 2127, and the gate switch 2751 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up. For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , A big hit determining initial value determining random number, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S5 Or as a mechanism to only update the non Toraku random number update processing.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 184 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created, or the main control board 4100 The self-check command shown in FIG. 184 for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 110, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 4110 has completed reception normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. To the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . Further, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (a variety of commands (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, frame State 2 command))), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S82, an illegal act detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2128 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 186 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number described above is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determine whether or not to generate a gaming state), take out the value of the counter that updates the jackpot symbol random number, and determine whether or not it matches the probability variation hit value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ( Or whether to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86, the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Is determined depending on whether or not the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper start port switch 3102, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 185 are created, while the lottery results are based on the lower start port switch 2127. In FIG. 185, various commands relating to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or the The lighting signal output to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so that the lower special symbol display 1186 is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2106 shown in FIG. 110 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2124 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times, The two-round display lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in 102 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round display lamp 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15-round display lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89 Is set to output a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the game status indicator 1183 is lit to indicate whether or not probability fluctuation has occurred in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2751 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2751 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2105 is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102 is achieved, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above. Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2121 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2105, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not match the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above is used. The variable display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is lit in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information described above is output as output information. Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or a big hit game In addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2124 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the prize winning opening 2103 and a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2121 that opens and closes the movable piece 2105, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals relating to the game are output to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands classified in relation to the special figure 1 tuning effect and various kinds classified in relation to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric effects, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related, and various commands classified into others are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the payout control unit is turned on, FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 191, and FIG. 193 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 195 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process, and FIG. 196 is a rotation chart. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball stagnation determination process, and FIG. 199 is a prize. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball award ball stock number addition process, and FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of payout ball removal determination setting processing, and FIG. 203 is payout. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process, FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the sphere removal setting process, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the sphere shooting operation setting process, and FIG. 206 is a retry action monitoring process. 207 is a flowchart illustrating an example of inconsistency counter reset determination processing, FIG. 208 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error release switch operation determination processing, and FIG. 209 is a payout operation by ball lending. Signal processing (a), input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit It is to the timing chart.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock number addition processing for balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball removal determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball bending operation setting processing, ball removal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing Inconsistency counter reset determination processing and error release switch operation determination processing will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release switch operation determination process are one process of the main operation setting process in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. , Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball edge determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release switch operation determination processing, Prize ball stock addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring Management and priority in the order of dispensing ball vent determination setting process is set.

[10-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, input / output setting of the I / O port of the payout control MPU 4120a is performed.

  Subsequent to step S502, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 174 (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal with the logic being LOW via the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120. Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal as an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 1 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  Subsequent to step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the latched state. When the D type flip-flop PIC22 latches the state that the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D type flip-flop PIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S510, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, stored in various flags and various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area) Flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be deleted. When not deleted, the value is set to 0. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, a setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM is performed (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that has been stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches a checksum value stored in a payout control unit power-off process (power-off) described later (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting a value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”). The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, interrupt permission is set (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S544), and the external watchdog is set. An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4120c (turns ON, step S546). The external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. To reset (periodically diagnosing whether the system of the payout control MPU 4120a is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor 744 is provided. The number of balls that the payout motor 744 has actually paid out the game balls is used as an award ball number information signal. (In this embodiment, every time the payout motor 744 pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 784), or an error LED. A display signal is output to the display unit 860c.

  Subsequent to step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. .

  Subsequent to step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball collision determination time and the payout rotation body 748 set as the determination conditions when determining whether or not the ball rotation state by the dispensing rotation body 748 shown in FIG. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. Time, full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the switch 750, the determination condition is used. In addition to performing time management such as the set ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 Are set as the determination conditions when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistently paid out due to inconsistency are repeatedly issued. Time management of mismatch counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. The ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set). By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and, when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced. Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the I / O port 4120b. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, pay a rental ball when not communicating with the CR unit 6. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. As a result, in the CR communication processing, at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is read from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 to inform the CR unit 6 that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S550, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is when the power is turned on, and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while when the logic is LOW, that is, a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 86. When not electrically connected via the terminal, the output of the payout control I / O port 4120b is set with the logic state of the PRDY signal set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output from terminal to CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 described above is stored based on the input information based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls filled are full, or the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 described above based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is a predetermined number or more. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls is determined by using the timer interruption period of 1.75 ms and the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and out of ball check process, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, timing of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball is filled with the state information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information for notifying the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full is stored in the state information storage area area. To do.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also checked using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned on in the processing, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned off in the previous full (1.75 ms before) and the ball break check processing, that is, the detection from the ball break switch 750 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is used. When the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is OFF while the information is stored in the state information storage area, the fact that the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not greater than a predetermined number is notified. The ball break information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 184) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be normally received, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, rental balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, a corresponding display is made. Data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame are classified into the state display shown in FIG. 186 based on the various types of information. (State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the piece of ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the frame state 1 command And transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (turns OFF, step S568). This clears the external WDT 4120c and prevents the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b from being reset. The external WDT 4120c starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S540 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S544. In step S546, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4120c, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, timer update processing is performed in step S552, and CR communication is performed in step S554. Processing, and in step S556, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed. In step S558, command reception processing is performed. In step S560, command analysis processing is performed. In step S562, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S564, LED display data generation processing is performed. In step S566, command transmission processing is performed. In S568, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF), and Steps S540 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S540 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S570, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b via the payout control I / O port 4120b (step S572). Thereby, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Subsequent to step S572, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S574, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. Subsequent to step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S578, a value 1 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed. Subsequent to step S580, access prohibition to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected. Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 4120a performs this payout control unit power-on process again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[10-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 191 to 193.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, a value 1 is set to the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S592, the register is switched (returned) (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Subsequent to step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[10-3. Ball removal switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 166 is operated.

  When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. S600). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S600, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is not operated.

  When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 72, and is 1 when the game balls are discharged. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S602, the above-described ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S604), and this routine is terminated. When the ball removal determination time becomes valid, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated in step S600, this routine is finished as it is. Note that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

[10-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 166 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a shown in FIG. 77 that grasps the rotation position of the dispensing rotator 748 changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. It is determined that the state has transitioned. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S618). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Shifts bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. To do.

  Subsequent to step S618, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is opened. The value of the least significant bit B0 according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit 749a has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[10-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In this sprocket fixed position determination skip process, the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 77 is in a fixed position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is to be performed, and is a value 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (when skipping). When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when not skipped), the value is set to 0.

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation is performed from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The corner switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit 749a described above is the light of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interruption cycles. It means that the shaft is in a state of transition from the shut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 166 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of about 2 steps of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, The detection signal history from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 196, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST Bits B3 to B0, that is, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 generated by the latest four timer interrupt cycles. . As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, since the dispensing motor 744 rotates four steps, it rotates more than the rotation of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the dispensing rotator 748 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interruption periods are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the fixed position determination skip flag. A value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set so that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

  Subsequent to step S636, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S638), and this routine is terminated. Here, as shown in FIG. 77, there are three detection slits 749a, which are the same number as the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and are formed equally on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board 749 (every 120 degrees). Yes. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotary body 748) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control MPU 4120 a manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) a transient state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit 749a changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit 749a A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”), and (3) the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocked state. It is managed in three states: a state transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation. .

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit 749a is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, and therefore the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 744. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634, When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is finished as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 72, and are taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Led to. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 77 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is increased. Note that the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[10-6. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this spherical collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a spherical collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the detection slit 749a rotates. This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the optical axis of the corner switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the state in which the dispensing rotator 748 is rotating and no ball stagnation has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the only operation is not performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the ball collision determination time is set to be valid (step S646), and this routine is terminated. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 193. .

[10-7. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The prize ball stock number adding process for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 77, the setting is made so that the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.

[10-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for the prize ball is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the routine is terminated as it is. If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is determined as a prize ball. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in this embodiment has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. Thereby, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The prize ball number PBV read in step S652 is added to the prize ball stock PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and this routine is terminated. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[10-7-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the lending prize ball stock number addition process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a lending request signal as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no ball rental request signal in step S660, the routine is terminated as it is, but when there is a ball rental request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. (Step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (Step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the rent request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, the ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[10-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 22 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is a process to be monitored.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Reading (step S670), it is determined whether or not the read award ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the attention threshold TH in step S672, the attention flag CA-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S674), and this routine ends. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking of game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH. Is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and is set to a value of 0 when the alert threshold value TH is not reached.

  On the other hand, if the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S676), and this routine is terminated.

  If the gaming state is a big hit, and the player relaxes and sees the performance unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. The played game ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to exceed the warning threshold value TH, which is shown in FIG. 19 as a warning effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player has filled the game ball in the lower plate 302 (the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540). It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[10-9. Dispensing ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 77, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. And the game ball stored in the tank rail 731 is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ball is squeezed, or such a payout or discharge is not performed. .

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 rotates from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The corner switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

  Following step S680, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 77 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether FLG is a value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, it is determined whether or not the ball ball flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 ( Step S686). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the only operation is not performed, the value is set to 0.

  When the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-pushing operation is not performed, the award ball stock is stored from the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball, whether the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and ball shortage check processing in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls, this routine is terminated as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1. (Step S696). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. The value 1 is set when the game balls are discharged, and the game balls are not discharged. When the value is set to 0. The determination in step S696 is performed based on the determination result in step S600 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 166, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination process.

  When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S698). This routine ends. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

  As described above, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting processing is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting processing, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are processed. Can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is finished as it is. . As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

  On the other hand, when the sphere engagement flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the sphere engagement operation is being performed, a sphere engagement operation setting process described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is terminated. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally performed, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is set (step S702). . In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, an error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine is terminated. In step S704, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 193. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 193. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[10-9-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 77 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 203 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Following step S714, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the real ball count PB is read (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. The count will be described later in detail, but the count input from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 77 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S730), and this routine is terminated. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is ended as it is. In this way, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented. Determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[10-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 77 is driven to perform a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. It is.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 204 (step S740). This determination is made based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S740, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 744 performs a ball removal operation. In this ball removal operation, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged.

  If the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S740, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S744, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S746), and this routine is ended. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

[10-9-3. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. This ball-striking operation setting process is a process for performing a setting for canceling the ball-shearing state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG.

  When the spherical movement operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the spherical collision determination time has elapsed (step 205) (step S1203). S750). This determination is made based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball stagnation determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

  Subsequent to step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the spherical motion is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to be performed (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout motor 744 is set. The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, as the end of the ball bending operation, a value 0 is set in the ball bending flag PBE-FLG (step S760), and this routine is ended. This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 performs a ball-spinning operation, the value 1 is When the movement operation is not performed (end of the ball movement operation), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, an error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 193. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 193. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, a value 0 is set to the ball-in-sphere flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-balling operation (step S766), and this routine is ended.

[10-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

  Following step S770, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the mismatch counter INCC is set. Add 1 to the value (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 77 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751. The number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 are usually equal to each other. 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are repeatedly paid. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. In some cases, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process in step S780 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not match due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, inconsistency The value 5 is set as the threshold INCTH. In the process for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the game ball payout operation (retry operation) performed by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, it is indicated that “retry error”. In order to notify, the error information indicator 860c, which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110, sets retry error information for displaying the number “5”, and the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above Is set (stored) (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165 is operated, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when this external factor occurs. Yes. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165 erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and the RAM clear notification command Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 30, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It has become.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  The payout control MPU 4120a uses the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. In step S566, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c is created in the LED display data creation process in step S564 in the process. The LED display information is stored in the output information storage area, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process. The number “5” is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 that has received the status command transmits the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 168 has a door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs on various decoration boards to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The plurality of LEDs emit light with a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number “" on the error LED display 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall conducts confirmation work such as malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860c are not notified, the process can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 is forced to generate the retry operation described above as being difficult to detect, Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 Since the plurality of LEDs emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 166 is operated. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. There is no.

[10-11. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 77 is calculated. This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to be calculated.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has passed (see FIG. 207). Step S790). This determination is made based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794), and this routine is ended. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Usually, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match, so the value 0 Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board 4 is exchanged (new stand replacement). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 77, the driving power for the prize ball device 740 and the control power for the payout control board 4110 are generated. The power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 5 is provided on the frame side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine an abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 193, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored at the time of power-off, while the payout control unit power-on shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to a game board 4 'having a different game specification different from the game board 4 and turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4 ′ attached, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ mounted, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of game balls that do not match is generated and the inconsistency counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 'and is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4120a in a short period. There is a risk. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation. As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation being set in the hall is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the hall's business hours. In this case, it is the same as the probability that one unsuccessful game ball is paid out due to the retry operation, and therefore, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, after 5 weeks, the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control MPU 4120a determines whether the count switch 751 receives the determination in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 206, the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, is notified of the number “ Set retry error information to display "5" and within payout control So that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated by making it difficult to detect the game ball received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and this Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by a retry operation is performed, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time, as described above, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is When the mismatch threshold value INCTH is exceeded, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a hall clerk or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 751 is intentionally set as described above. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[10-12. Error release switch operation determination process]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 166 is operated.

  When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated as shown in FIG. S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error release switch 860a. When the input information includes a detection signal from the error release switch 860a, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is not operated.

  When the error release switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated in step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 77 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control MPU 4120a is set, it confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

  Subsequent to step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. 193, and the read status information A status command is created on the basis of the command and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Retry operation error notification processing is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times.) By repeatedly flowing from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 30, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It informs hall clerk. The store clerk or the like who heard this retry operation error notification announces the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 77, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Can be confirmed very quickly compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, release setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopped or a ball can be lent out by the error LED indicator 860c, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110. In this case, the logic of the above-mentioned PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the state in which the PRDY signal has been raised is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860c has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the lending device such as a game ball is connected from the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, an error flag initialization process is performed (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 193. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, the internal factor In response to the occurrence of the error, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the process. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, this is an external factor. In response to the occurrence of the error, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 165 is operated, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[10-13. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process in FIG. 193 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[10-13-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. If the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, is raised and held, and is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120. To the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as TDS shown in FIG. 167 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS is inputted pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H1. ) Elapses from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball, and the predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, and 100 yen as a monetary amount). It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the payout), rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as an amount, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, from the timing H2 to the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to notify that the one-time payout operation has been started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the payout control I is held in the raised state. / O port 4120b and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 209 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) from the timing H4. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while keeping its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS. It is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as shown in FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 209 (c). Then, the EXS signal that has been started up and held is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. And output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). 209 is low, i.e., when it is held down and held), as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the PRDY signal that has been started up and held from timing H1 is set to logic LOW, that is, in a state of falling. It is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It is output from the control I / O port 4120b, and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls of 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[10-13-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to send BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending demand monitoring time HA has passed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. A ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is used to output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started up, or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 209 (e) and (f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and starts a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the signal is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 while maintaining the lowered state as PRDY. Is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while maintaining the lowered state. Is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

  Subsequently, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 as HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF from the timing J5 (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 165 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 212 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, and FIG. 215 is a rotation detection switch history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example.

  As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, rotation detection The switch history creation process will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[11-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[11-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 168 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, when interrupt permission is set. Various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 169, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information that is the content that is backed up to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) 1ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and the Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d shown in FIG. (SRAM) is compared, and production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 169 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 168 after performing this initialization setting process. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  Subsequent to step S1000, a current time information acquisition process is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the liquid crystal display so that the luminance of the LED included in the acquired luminance setting information is obtained. A process of lighting the apparatus 1900 by adjusting the brightness of the backlight is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information is currently set with luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is included. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to light the LED, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed. It has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the value 0 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, it is determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this ramp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 3041 shown in FIG. 168 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 169 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the ramp data output process, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 168 is performed. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It has been created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Following step S1012, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The operation of the unit 405 is monitored and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. And it reflects the state of operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects whether appropriately determined.

  Subsequent to step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is canceled. It has become. This can prevent a delay in processing time. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1 by the ramp data output process in step S1012. Provided in the speaker 821 and the door frame 5 provided in the main body frame 3 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262.

  Subsequent to step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data, or the music and sound effects are output. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound or notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the notification sound and notification sound are also stereo. Or played.

  Subsequent to step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 169 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac are analyzed. As shown in FIG. 185, the various commands are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands classified as notification display, and status display as shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others.

  Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 186, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The set screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set, are the various control data of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. The data is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and based on the light emission data pointed to by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the gaming board 4 shown in FIG. It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of 4150, set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. A plurality of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the LED is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is displayed in the peripheral control unit. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of 4150 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, Extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion 1912 is converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 can be set by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are used. , 262, but the production sound such as music and sound effects is small, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) ) Can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the volume developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be made more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, and that the screen will be more advantageous to the player and the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

  Subsequent to step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 169 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is subject to backup every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 169, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1) of the backup first area 4150cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is specified as the request factor of the MA controller 4150ac, and the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 169, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db by using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150a Is stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM), specifying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and copying to Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. The contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, a value of 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1038), and the process returns again to step S1006. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”. The peripheral control unit steady process starts with setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010. Step S1012, Step S1014,..., And Step S1036. Finally, in Step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, and when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0, the process is completed Will be. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on in FIG. In step S1009 in the time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In addition to the signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By notifying the completion to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. Is determined, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. . In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[11-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 210 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 168 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine control section steady process of the peripheral control section power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 169 are arranged in time series. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 3042 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the frame I / O port serial transmission I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. Based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is generated by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf for decorative driving amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 3042 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created. Peripheral control RAM 41 shown in FIG. Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of 0c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. For example, the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are generated, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally illustrated in FIG. Set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, backup processing is performed (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 169 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (in the backup first area 4150 cb) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 169 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the MA controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 210, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production. Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. In some cases, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[11-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 168, when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the main control includes the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 213 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main circumference serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 169, as shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[11-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 170 is input via the main control board 4100 will be described. To do. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 168 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure notification signal is input. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sequentially executed by sequentially turning off the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing this, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 169 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac by the core 4150aa are transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 169 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 168 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, and when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 210 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal is continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with various noises by automatically resetting.

[11-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection switch history creation process executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212 will be described. In the rotation detection switch history creation processing, the history of detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. 47 is created.

  When the rotation detection switch history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 168 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” is a bit. And a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and from the rotation detection switch 432b. The detection signal history is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

  Following step S1400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, among the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged at regular intervals on the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. While one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432a has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the one rotation detection piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, it is determined that one rotation detection piece is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while from the rotation detection switch 432b. When there is no detection signal, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b from the blocking state to the non-blocking state.

  When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402 or when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1404). In this rotation detection switch detection history information shift process, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5. , B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, while shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 bit by bit, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1 , B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, from least significant bit B0 to most significant bit B Shifted by one bit towards the.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1408). In this rotation detection switch detection history information shift process, the same process as the rotation detection switch detection history information shift process in step S1404 is performed. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read in step S1400. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 such that the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6. B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B ← B1, B1 ← and so that the least significant bit B0, shifted by one bit toward the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, each time this rotation detection switch history creation process is executed, rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

  Next, the dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). ) A method for determining whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 217 is the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 218 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. FIG. 218B is a list showing ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. is there.

  As described above, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, “ B "represents a bit.), And the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST shown in FIG. Is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST. It is remembered. Therefore, whether the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step), whether it is rotating in the clockwise direction, or counterclockwise? In the case of determining whether the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and is consistent with the detection determination value. Depending on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 168, and is copied to various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Is read and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit).” The upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. ing. That is, this determination is performed based on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0 to HIST and DSW1 to HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value.

  Specifically, when the low-order 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST have the value 1, the rotation detection switch 432a is continuously set to the dial operation unit 401 by the occurrence of four 1 ms timer interrupts. Means that the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1, the value is 4 times 1 ms. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401, following the occurrence of the timer interruption.

  Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIGS. 216 to 218, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively. , Step 2, Step 3 and Step 4 are sequentially shifted, and after moving to Step 4, the process returns to Step 1 again.

  When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 216, the rotation detection switches 432 a and 432 b detect the rotation detection piece 410 c of the driven gear 410 as shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the transition to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Thereafter, due to the shift to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are rotated detection pieces. The process proceeds to a step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step in which the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 217, as shown in FIG. 217, both rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step in which the detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to each of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect both rotations. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection switch 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  In other words, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned on (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected) / OFF (the rotation detection piece 410c is not detected). As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both “ON” in Step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “ON” in Step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432b is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned on / off in step 1 as shown in FIG. 218B. In step 2, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “ON”, while the rotation detection switch 432a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432a is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  When the dial operation unit 401 stops without rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b does not change, so the rotation detection switch in step 1 to step 4 Switching of ON / OFF operation by 432a and 432b is completely eliminated.

  As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on the ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by a player's operation, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by detecting the switching of the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. It is possible to grasp the rotation direction, and to grasp that the dial operation unit 401 is stopped by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between ON / OFF states. Can do.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is executing a control that rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise, the player presses the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or palm and presses the dial operation unit 401. When the rotation of 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between ON / OFF states. It can be grasped that the dial drive motor 414 that is a stepping motor is out of step.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a pair of side speakers 130 that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of FIG. 25, and the right side decoration unit of FIG. A speaker such as an upper right speaker 222 attached to 200, an upper left speaker 262 attached to the left side decoration unit 240 in FIG. 32, and a lower speaker 821 attached to the speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 in FIG. A volume control volume 1912 that can be played, a main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game, and a peripheral control board 4140 that controls the progress of the presentation based on various commands of FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 from the main control board 4100 It is equipped with.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 performs music and effects related to the performance at the volume set by the volume adjustment volume 1912 in the sound data creation process of step S1032 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The volume of performance sound such as sound can be adjusted, and the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in addition to the connection abnormality display command and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command of FIG. A state in which the original position of the movable body cannot be detected or a state in which the movable position cannot be detected, etc.) and an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a winning abnormality display command, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display command, etc. in FIG. 186) The volume adjustment volume 1912 sets a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk. Thereby making it possible to adjust without being dependent on the volume. Specifically, in the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 is converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The volume set in the board volumes 0 to 6 adjusts the volume of the production sound such as music related to the production and sound effects, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit is set to the volume set in the board volume 0 to 6. By controlling the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160 and outputting the sound data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, the speaker 821 and the door frame provided in the main body frame 3 are output. Music and sound effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in FIG. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 can be set by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1912 to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are used. , 262, music and sound effects are reduced, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is cheating, the volume is set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume). The notification sound can be played, and the volume of the advertisement sound can be reduced based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, thereby preventing music and sound effects. On the other hand, the volume of the advertisement sound is increased so that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful in addition to music and sound effects. Production or, it is also possible to or announcement that is likely to shift to an advantageous game state for the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 is volume-adjusted in the sound data generation process in step S1032 in the sound data output process in step S1018 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is possible to execute control in which the production sound and the notification sound are sent from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5. Specifically, the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, or in addition to music and sound effects, notification sound Or the sound data of the notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the notification sound and notification sound are also stereo. Or played.

  In this way, the sound data creation process in step S1032 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 210 is performed so that the volume of the effect sound such as the music related to the effect and the sound effect becomes the volume set by the volume adjustment volume 1912. While the volume is adjusted in FIG. 2, the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 depends on the volume set by the volume adjustment volume 1912 Since the volume is adjusted in the sound data creation process in step S1032 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 210, the volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are independent of each other. It has come to be adjusted. Thereby, even when the sound data creation process is in a state where the volume of the effect sound is adjusted to be small according to the volume set by the volume adjustment volume 1912, the sound data creation process has a volume that is larger than the volume of the effect sound. Since the volume of the notification sound can be adjusted to (in this embodiment, the maximum volume), in the sound data output process of step S1018 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. By executing the control to flow the sound from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, the notification sound becomes louder than the production sound, and the player or hall clerk Etc. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

[12. Explanation of the progress of the gaming machine]
Next, the progress (for example, lottery, production) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 realized by the cooperation of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 described above will be described.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of variable display pattern tables. Each variation display pattern table may include a plurality of variation display patterns. The pachinko gaming machine 1 selects one variation display pattern table from a plurality of variation display pattern tables, and selects the variation display pattern selected based on the detection of the game balls of the upper start port switch 3102 and the lower start port switch 2127. One variation display pattern can be determined from the table. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the first special symbol on the special symbol indicators 1189 and 1186, the variation of the second special symbol, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like based on the determined variation display pattern.

  The display effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 may include a pseudo-continuous effect (described later) performed before the main effect in addition to a main effect that may include a reach effect described later. In other words, the main effect is an effect excluding the pseudo-continuous effect in the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The variable display pattern can define the type of main effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the number of pseudo-continuous effects. In addition, the variation display pattern defines at least the variation time of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation time is the time from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops. The variation time of the special symbol is substantially equal to the time (also referred to as effect time) in which the display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the variation display pattern in the variation. Therefore, it can be said that the variable display pattern defines the total time of the pseudo-continuous production time and the main production time. Details of the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 including such control and the gaming state associated with the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

[12-1. Description of gaming state]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it can shift to various gaming states. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can transition to any one of a normal external disadvantageous state, a normal external advantageous state, a probability variation external disadvantageous state, and a probability variation external advantageous state. Normally, the external disadvantageous state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function and the time shortening function are not activated. Normally, the external advantageous state is a gaming state in which the probability reduction function is not activated and the time reduction function is activated. The probability variation external disadvantageous state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated and the time reduction function is not activated. The probability variation external advantageous state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated.

  Here, the probability variation function is a function for setting the above-described probability variation state, that is, a function in which the probability of winning a big hit (big hit probability) in the big hit lottery described later is set higher than the normal probability (predetermined probability). It is. The time reduction function means that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that fluctuates on the normal symbol display 1189 is shortened compared to the normal time, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery described later is higher than the normal probability (predetermined probability). By setting, the opening and closing of the movable piece 2105 is frequently executed, and this is a function of increasing the ease of winning a prize to the lower start port 2102 than usual. The normal external advantageous state, the probability variation external disadvantageous state, and the probability variation external advantageous state can be shifted to after a big hit game with a big hit as an opportunity. From the external advantageous state to the external disadvantageous state, it is possible to shift after the big hit game with the big hit as an opportunity, and it is possible to change according to the fact that the number of lotteries after the big hit has reached a predetermined number associated with the big hit. Of these gaming states, the probable external advantageous state is the most advantageous for the player, the normal external advantageous state and the probable external disadvantageous state are the next most advantageous for the player, and the normal external disadvantageous state is the most disadvantageous for the player. is there.

  In the present embodiment, the “number of fluctuations” is the number counted as 1 when the special symbol starts to change and stops, and corresponds to the number of lottery lotteries.

  Further, the normal external disadvantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantageous state are common in that the jackpot probability is different, but the time reduction function is not activated. Therefore, the generic term of the gaming state including the normal external disadvantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantageous state is also referred to as a short time non-gaming state. On the other hand, the normal external advantageous state and the probable variation external advantageous state are states in which the time reduction function is activated, and hence the generic term of the gaming state including the normal external advantageous state and the probable variation external advantageous state is also referred to as the short-time gaming state. Call. Further, the probability external advantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantageous state are different in the presence or absence of the time reduction function, but the probability variation function is common. Therefore, the generic term of the gaming state including the probability external advantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantageous state is also referred to as a probability variation actuated gaming state. On the other hand, the normal external disadvantageous state and the normal external advantageous state are gaming states in which the probability variation function is not activated, so the generic term of the gaming state including the normal external disadvantageous state and the normal external advantageous state is definitely changed operation. Also called no-game state.

[12-2. Control processing on main control board regarding progress of game]
Next, of the control processing executed by the above-described main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a), a portion that is strongly related to the progress of the game will be further described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 229. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 222 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. FIG. 224 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 225 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. FIG. 230 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means. Note that the processes in FIGS. 221 to 229 are realized by repeating the process in FIG. 190.

  Here, determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state using the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is also referred to as “big hit determination” or “big hit lottery”. It is also referred to as “special symbol lottery” to determine which symbol the special symbol is to be stopped by using the random symbol for the big hit symbol when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination. Further, determining whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state is also referred to as “small hit determination” or “small hit lottery”. In the present embodiment, the small hit determination is performed using the aforementioned big hit determination random number. When it is determined that the small hit gaming state is generated in the small hit determination, it is determined by lottery using the small hit symbol random number to stop the special symbol. Whether it is determined that the big hit game state is not generated by the big hit determination and the small hit determination state is determined not to generate the small hit gaming state, and whether or not to lose with the reach mode using the random number for reach determination This determination is also called “reach determination”. It is determined by lottery using a random number for variation display pattern (random number for variation time) to determine which pattern the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 1185, 1186 is executed. , Also called “variable display pattern lottery”. Determining whether or not the movable piece 2105 that opens and closes the lower start port 2102 is controlled to be in the open state is also referred to as a normal symbol lottery. .

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is determined using a big hit determination random number, a big hit (also referred to as “probability change big hit”) in which the probability variation function operates after the big hit game using the big hit symbol random number. Or a jackpot (also called “probability judgment”) that determines whether the probability fluctuation function does not work (also called “probability judgment”), and a jackpot (“timed big jackpot” for which the time shortening function operates after the jackpot game) Or a big hit that does not operate the time-shortening function (also referred to as “short-time no big hit”) and a big hit with a lot of balls (general big hit, Alternatively, a determination is made as to whether or not to make a big hit that is substantially free of balls (also called a special hit or a big hit without a ball). Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined. Further, based on the big hit determination random number, determining whether or not the “big hit lottery” or “small hit lottery” is won is also referred to as “hit lottery”. Further, the entire determination performed by the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number is also referred to as a special lottery. The decorative design of the present embodiment is configured by a design representing a numerical value.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery is performed by comparing the jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination table (the above-described normal time determination table and the probability variation determination table) in which the winning random number is determined in advance. Similarly, the special symbol lottery is performed by comparing the jackpot symbol random number with a special symbol determination table in which a winning random number is determined in advance. The reach determination is performed by comparing the reach determination random number with a reach determination table in which a winning random number is determined in advance. The variation display pattern lottery is performed by comparing the variation display pattern random number with the variation display pattern table in which the winning random number is associated with each variation display pattern in advance. The normal symbol lottery is performed by comparing a random number for determination per normal symbol with a normal symbol determination table in which a winning random number is determined in advance. The small hit lottery is performed by comparing the big hit determination random number with a small hit determination table in which a winning random number is determined in advance. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of tables can be used for the jackpot determination table and the variable display pattern table. Details of this will be described later.

  Among these random numbers, the above-described winning random number update process (FIG. 190) relates to whether or not to control the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the movable piece 2105 to the open state. The random number for judgment per normal symbol is updated. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2105 to the open state is updated at a specific timing (in this embodiment, every time the main control timer interrupt process is performed). Is done. By doing in this way, the winning probability of the big hit lottery using the random number and the normal symbol lottery can be made constant, and the player can be prevented from being in a disadvantaged state. On the other hand, as described above, in the non-winning random number update process (FIG. 189), the generation of the big hit gaming state, the reach determination random number not related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

  Next, the start opening winning process which is one of the processes related to the progress of the game will be described. The start opening winning process is a process executed as a part of the switch input process (S74) in the main control timer interruption process (FIG. 190) described above, and game balls are placed in the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102. It is a process of determining whether or not a prize has been won and updating the pending lottery status when winning.

  First, in the start port winning process, as shown in FIG. 221, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the lower start port switch 2127, and if a detection signal is output from the lower start port switch 2127, It is determined that a game ball has won the start opening 2102 (YES in step S201). If no detection signal is output from the lower start opening switch 2127, no game ball has been won in the lower start opening 2102 (step S201). NO). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the lower start opening 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variation display patterns, etc.) To determine whether or not the value of the second reserved number counter provided in the built-in RAM is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). If the second number-of-holds counter is less than 4 in step S202, a second start-up storage process (step S203) for storing the acquired various random numbers in the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 described below, and A hold history update process (step S204) for reflecting the change in the hold state on the special symbol memory display 1187 is executed. If the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from lower start port switch 2127 at step S201 (NO at step S201), or when the value of the second reserved number counter is 4 (NO at step S202). Then, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the upper start port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the upper start port switch 3102. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won the upper start port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the built-in RAM is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). If the first number-of-holds counter is less than 4 in step S206, first start-hold storage processing (step S207) for storing the acquired various random numbers in first special symbol random number storage means 4515, which will be described later, A holding history update process (step S208) for reflecting the change of the holding state on the special symbol memory display 1184 is executed. If the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  Note that, in steps S203 and S207 of FIG. 221, the main control MPU 4100a stores in the transmission information storage area of the built-in RAM as a transmission information a start opening prize command for notifying a winning of a game ball to the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. Remember. The start opening winning command represents the number of reserved numbers of various random numbers stored. Even if a game ball is received in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, if the random number is not stored as a hold, the main control MPU 4100a stores the start opening winning command in the transmission information storage area You don't have to. The start opening prize command stored in the transmission information storage area of the built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described peripheral control board command transmission process (FIG. 190: step S92 :). The peripheral control board 4140 may display the hold number on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the received start opening prize command.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a start opening prize command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the small hit lottery, the determination of the variable display pattern), and the lottery result is determined in advance. is there. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to a table (for example, a big hit determination table, a special symbol determination table, a variable display pattern table, and a small hit determination table) used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number and the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (whether the big hit or the small hit is successful and the type of the big hit (details will be described later, for example, for example). (Whether it is a general big hit or a special win) and a variable display pattern or the like) (the determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received start opening prize command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “ Also called “prefetching”). For example, when the preceding determination result indicates that an effect with a specific character as a motif is realized, the pre-reading effect indicates that the specific character performs a predetermined action in the effect before the effect is realized. An effect to be executed may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a start opening winning command representing the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition, and when the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the advance determination process A start opening prize command that does not represent the result may be transmitted. For example, when the variable display resulting from winning at the upper start opening 2101 is not started immediately after winning but is put on hold, the main control MPU 4100a displays a start opening winning command indicating the result of the preceding determination process related to the winning You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the external advantageous state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the start opening winning command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, and does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be sent. The specific conditions for the lower start port 2102 may be similar. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the external disadvantageous state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the start opening winning command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, and does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be sent.

  Next, the process realized by the above-described special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 190: step S86) will be described. In this process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S3000 to step S9000 as shown in FIG. In the fluctuation start process of step S3000, the number of holds is confirmed, and if the number of holds (total number of memories) is not 0, necessary processes are performed before starting the variable display of the corresponding special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (profit granting state). At this time, the main control MPU 4100a performs initial setting and addition of the variation counter KC as necessary. The fluctuation count counter KC is a variable indicating the number of fluctuations (number of lottery lotteries) since the last big win. In the variation pattern setting process in step S4000, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a selects a variable display pattern table (hereinafter also referred to as a reference table) to be referred to, and refers to the table to determine a special symbol variable display pattern. Then, main control MPU 4100a sets, in a timer, a variation time set in accordance with the variation display pattern (the time from the start of special symbol variation display at 1185 and 1186 until it stops). To do.

  In the changing process of step S5000, the timer whose change time is set in the change display pattern setting process (step S4000) is monitored, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is determined based on the time-out of the timer. The process which stops the change display of the special symbol in is performed. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit lottery in the variation start process (step S3000) is a big hit lottery game state, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and the same lottery is decided to enter the small hit lotion gaming state. Then, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”. Further, the main control MPU 4100a performs various processes such as ending the time saving function in accordance with the value of the variation counter KC.

  In the big hit game start process of step S6000, setting for starting the big hit game state is performed. Although specifically described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 and the opening time are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S7000, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 at the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the big hit game process in step S8000, the big prize opening 2103 is opened, and the opening / closing member 2106 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Perform the process. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the process for making the opening / closing member 2106 open again is performed. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, the processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, a process that can generate the probability variation function and the time reduction function is executed.

  In the small hit game processing in step S9000, the big winning opening 2103 is opened, and the opening / closing member 2106 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process. As will be described in detail later, the opening of the big prize opening 2103 in the small hit game process is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low compared to the big hit game process (step S8000) in the general big hit. Yes. Next, specific processing in steps S2000 to S9000 will be described.

  Subsequently, in the variation start process, as shown in FIG. 223, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S3001), the process after step S3002 is performed. If the process is not “0” (NO in step S3001), the variation start process is terminated. In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 are “0”. Since the sum of the values in the two pending number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 4532 (see FIG. 230)), in step S3002 If the values of any of the number-of-holds counters are both “0” (YES), it is determined that the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the hold counters is not “0” in step S3002 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S3003 to S3011). As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). Each is associated with the value of the stored number (“1” to “4”). Further, as shown in FIG. 230 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). The two start memory numbers (“1” to “4”) are associated with each value. Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d includes a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. .

  In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number storage means. It is determined whether or not random numbers are stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of 4532 (step S3003). If random numbers are stored (NO), each storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more) ( Processing for shifting various random numbers stored in the storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c) ( Step S3004) and processing for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (step S3005) are executed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S3006), and a process of subtracting “1” from the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S3007).

  On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the holding number counter corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1186 is “0”. (YES in step S3003), stored in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Process (step S3008) for shifting various random numbers to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), and the storage area [1] 4515a A process of acquiring a random number related to one special symbol (step S3009) is executed. Further, “2” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S3010), and a process of subtracting “1” from the holding number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed (step S3011).

  That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the holding number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is Stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first starting memory number, but when the first special symbol starts to change, only when the second starting memory number is “0”, that is, processing by the first special symbol The first storage area “first special symbol random number storage means 4515” is used only when the process (referred to as the first process) is on standby and the process based on the second special symbol (referred to as the second process) is not on standby. Each random number is read from “1” 4515a. This control enables the second process to be performed with priority over the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S3012). If not in the probability variation state (NO in step S3012), the probability variation is not activated. A big hit determination table is selected (step S3013). On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation state (YES in step S3012), the jackpot determination table for the probability variation operation is selected (step S3015). The jackpot determination table for when the probability variation is not activated is a table in which the number of winning random numbers determined in advance is smaller than the jackpot determination table for when the probability variation is activated. In other words, the jackpot determination table for the probability variation operation is a table in which the number of predetermined winning random numbers is larger than the probability variation non-operation jackpot determination table. Therefore, as described above, when the probability variation function is activated (that is, when the probability variation external advantageous state and the certain variation external disadvantageous state), the probability variation function is not activated (that is, when the normal variation advantageous state and normal external disadvantageous state). However, the probability of hitting is high. In this embodiment, when the probability variation is not activated, the jackpot probability is set to 2/700, and when the probability variation is activated, the probability of being a jackpot is set to 20/700. Here, it is assumed that it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using a random number representing one value randomly selected from 700 values. However, the total number of values that the random number can take is 700. It may be any other number different from the number (for example, a number greater than 700 or a number less than 700). The probability of winning a big hit is not limited to these, and may be set to other values. For example, the jackpot probability when the probability variation function is not activated may be 1/299, and the jackpot probability when the probability variation function is activated may be 10/299.

  After any table is selected in step S3013 or step S3015, a random number (a jackpot determination random number) related to any special symbol obtained in step S3005 or step S3009 based on the table is determined to be a big hit. It is determined whether or not the corresponding random number (big hit value) (step S3016 (big hit lottery)). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S3016), the fluctuation counter KC is initialized (step S3017), the big hit flag is set to “ON” (step S3018), and the process proceeds to step S3021. Here, the initial setting of the variation counter KC is performed, for example, by setting the value of the variation counter KC to an initial value (0 in the present embodiment). On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S3016), “1” is added to the fluctuation counter KC (step S3017b), and the random number (small hit value corresponding to the small hit value). ) Is determined using the small hit determination table (step S3019 (small hit lottery)). If it is a small hit (YES in step S3019), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S3020), and the process proceeds to step S3021. If it is not a small hit (NO in step S3019), the process proceeds to step S3021 without going through step S3020. In step S3021, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. The ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the built-in RAM. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  Next, in the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 224, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “1”. If it is “1” in step S3017 (YES in step S4001), The process after step S4002 is executed, and if it is not “1” (NO in step S4001), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In step S4002, a variation display pattern table to be referred to is selected according to a table migration table TI shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a table A, a table B, a table C, a table D, a table E, a table F, and a table G as variable display pattern tables. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the table A, the table B, the table C, the table D, the table E, the table are used according to the table migration table TI by using the last jackpot type and the variation counter KC. F, the variation display pattern table to be referred to is selected from the table G (steps S4005 to S4011). Details of the variable display pattern table will be described later.

  In step S4015, the variation display pattern table selected in any of steps S4005 to 4011 described above, the result of the winning lottery (FIG. 223: steps S3016 and S3019) (the state of the big hit flag and the small hit flag), and step S3005 Alternatively, the variable display pattern is determined based on the various random numbers (big hit design random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number) acquired in any of steps S3009 (step S4015). Next, the variable display pattern is determined according to the mode of the command (in this embodiment, the special figure synchronization production start command (the special figure 1 synchronization production start command or the special figure 2 synchronization production start command) that is designated in step S4015. The selected value is set (step S4016), and the variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is set in a timer (effective period timer in this embodiment) provided in the built-in RAM of the main control board 4100. Set (step S4017). In step S4017, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S4015 is set in the effective period timer. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92, a command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S4015 described above, a lottery result command indicating whether it is out of place, small hit, or big win, In some cases, a hit type command indicating the type of jackpot, a gaming state indicating whether the gaming state in the fluctuation is a normal external disadvantageous state, a normal external advantageous state, a probable variation external advantageous state, or a probable variation external disadvantageous state The command and the effect command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). In the present embodiment, the lottery result command and the win type command are, for example, a special symbol 1 designation command and a special symbol 2 designation command, and the gaming state command is, for example, a variable state designation command (FIG. 185). Here, the effect command is, for example, a command to be referred to when determining the effect to be performed by the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, a special figure synchronization effect start command for designating a variable display pattern).

  In addition, when an effect command such as a special symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the peripheral control board command transmission process, a drive signal is output to the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186. Then, the special symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S4018), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the changing process, as shown in FIG. 225, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S5001). If it is “2” in step S4018 (step S5001). In step S5002, the process after step S5002 is executed. If it is not “2” (NO in step S5001), the changing process is terminated. In step S5002, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is up (step S5003). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is ended (YES in step S5003), the fluctuation is stopped (step S5004), and the process proceeds to step S5005. At this time, the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 an effect stop command for stopping the operation of a decoration assist effect device (for example, a speaker, etc.) that assists the variation of the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the game effect. . In the present embodiment, the effect stop command is, for example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or a special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (FIG. 185).

  If none of the special symbols has changed (NO in step S5002), or if the fluctuation time has not ended (NO in step S5003), the special symbols are changing without stopping. The process ends.

  In step S5005, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation count counter KC is equal to or greater than the short time duration count KCth. The short-time continuation count KCth is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the short-time continuation count KCth is determined as one of “50 times”, “70 times”, “100 times”, and “until the next big hit win”. When the time-continuous number of times KCth is “until the next big hit win”, the determination result is “No” regardless of the value of the variation number counter KC.

  If the determination result in step S5005 is “Yes”, in step S5006, if the time reduction function is activated, the time reduction function is stopped. Then, control goes to a step S5008. By the processing in step S5006, the gaming state shifts from the external advantageous state to the external disadvantageous state.

  If the determination result of step S5005 is “No”, the process proceeds to step S5008 without executing the process of step S5006.

  In step S5008, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON”. If the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S5008), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S5009). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S5008), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S510). If it is “ON” (YES in step S5010). The processing flag is updated to “4” (step S5011), and when it is not “ON” (NO in step S5010), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S5012). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S5009, step S5011, or step S5012, the changing process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 226, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S5009 (YES in step S6001). ), The process after step S6002 is executed, and if it is not “3” (NO in step S6001), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S6002, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S6004. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S6002), the process proceeds to step S6004 without executing the process of step S6003. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S6005). The process proceeds to S6007. On the other hand, when the game is not in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S6004), the process proceeds to step S6007 without executing the process in step S6005.

  In step S6007, the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is opened (the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106), the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 (the opening time of the big winning opening 2103), and the big winning opening 2103. Set the number of winnings to be limited. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is opened and the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 are determined according to the type of jackpot. Further, the limited number of winnings is a predetermined value (for example, 9) regardless of the type of jackpot. After step S6007, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 227, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S5008 (YES in step S7001). ), The processing of step S7002 and step S7003 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is terminated without executing the processing of step S7002 and step S7003. To do. In step S7002, the condition for opening the big prize opening 2103 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small hits for the big prize opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2106, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in a small hit, the number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S6007) set when winning a big hit M (details will be described later) which is a special win. Yes. That is, the big hit M and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S7003), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 228, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”. If it is “5” in step S6009 (YES in step S8001). If the process after step S802 is not “5” (NO in step S8001), the big hit game process is terminated. In step S8002, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S8003), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S8003), the open / close member 2106 is operated to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S8005).

  Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S8003), the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 2103 after the big winning opening 2103 is opened is set in step S6007. When the limit number (for example, 9) is exceeded (YES in step S8004), the process proceeds to step S8005 to close the special prize opening 2103. If the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 has not reached the set time (NO in step S8003) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit (NO in step S8004), The jackpot game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8002 that the big prize opening 2103 is not open (NO), whether or not the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 has reached the number of big hits opened in step S6007. Is discriminated (step S8006). If not reached (NO in step S8006), the open / close member 2106 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S8007), and the big hit game process is ended.

  In step S8006, when the number of times of opening the big prize opening 2103 has reached the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S8008 to step S8020 can be executed, and thereafter The game state for the lottery is set. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S8008), and subsequently, the operating states of the probability variation function and the time reduction function are controlled according to the type of the jackpot (this will be described in detail later) ( Steps S8010 to S8020).

  In step S8010, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a big hit that activates the probability variation function. If the current jackpot is a jackpot that activates the probability variation function (step S8010: YES), the probability variation function is activated (step S8012), and the process proceeds to step S8014. If the current big hit is not the big hit that activates the probability variation function (NO in step S8010), the process proceeds to step S8014 without actuating the probability variation function.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a big hit (winning) during the time-shortening function operation (step S8014). If it is a big hit during the operation of the time reduction function (step S8014: YES), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S8016), and the process proceeds to step S8020. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit during operation of the time reduction function (step S8014: NO), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a big hit for operating the time reduction function (step S8018). If the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time-shortening function (step S8018: YES), the process proceeds to step S8016. If the current big hit is not the big hit that activates the time-shortening function (step S8018: NO), the process proceeds to step S8020.

  As can be seen from the above description, even if the current big hit is not the big hit that activates the time reduction function, if the current big hit is a hit in the external advantageous state, the time reduction function continues to operate.

  In step S8020, the process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot game process is terminated.

  Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 229, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S7003 (YES in step S9001). ), The process after step S9002 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S9001), the small hit game process is terminated. In step S9002, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the grand prize opening 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S9002). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) ), It is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open (step S9003). If it is determined in step S9003 that the big prize opening 2103 is open (YES), the opening time of the big prize opening 2103 (elapsed time after opening) reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S9004, if it has elapsed (YES in step S9004), the open / close member 2106 is operated to close the special prize opening 2103 (step S9005). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening 2103 is opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (step S9006). If the number has been reached (YES), the processing flag is set to “ It is updated to “0” (step S9007), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  If the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 has not reached the predetermined time in step S9004 (NO), or if the number of opening has not reached the predetermined number in step S9006 (NO), the process of step S9007 is executed. The small hit game process is terminated without doing so. In step S9003, if the big prize opening 2103 is not open (NO), the big prize opening 2103 is opened to allow a game ball to be won (step S9008). In step S9002, when the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 2103 has reached the preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step). (S9009) If it is open (YES), the special prize opening 2103 is closed (step S9010), and the process proceeds to step S9006. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 2103 is not open (NO in step S9009), the process proceeds to step S9006 without executing the process of step S9010. In step S9007, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

[12-3. Control processing on peripheral control board for game progress]
Next, of the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 described above, a portion that is strongly related to the progress of the game will be further described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 210: Step S1022). FIG. 232 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect display schedule data update process. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process. Note that the processing in FIGS. 231 to 233 is realized by repeating the processing in FIG. 210.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines a display effect based on the variable display pattern (variation time) determined by the main control MPU 4100a, and executes the determined display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp driving substrate 3041, and the like within the variable time. Let The control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a regarding these display effects is realized by repeatedly executing the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 210) described above.

  Next, received command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 231, first, it is determined whether or not a command (see FIG. 185) including a command related to effects has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1501). In this embodiment, when a command is received from the main control board 4100, as described above, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is stored in the received command storage area 4150cac (FIG. 169) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Stored sequentially. In step S1502, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if a command is stored, an effect command having the reception order in the received command storage area is read.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read command is a special figure synchronization effect start command (special figure 1 synchronization effect start command or special figure 2 synchronization effect start command) for designating a variable display pattern (step S1503). Is a special figure synchronization effect start command (YES in step S1503), a reception flag is set and stored in a predetermined storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4150c mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1504).

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special symbol synchronization effect start command (NO in step S1503), the read command is a special symbol designation command (special symbol 1 designation command or special symbol 2) indicating the lottery result of the special lottery. It is determined whether the command is a designated command (step S1505). If the command is a special symbol designation command (YES in step S1505), it is determined whether the lottery result shown in the special symbol designation command is a command (also referred to as a probability variation jackpot command) indicating that it is a probability variation jackpot (step S1506) If the read command is a probability variation jackpot command (YES in step S1506), a probability variation jackpot flag and a flag associated with a special symbol designation command (lottery result) are set (step S1506). . If the read command is not a special symbol designation command (NO in step S1505), or if the read command is not a probability change big hit command (NO in step S1506), the flag corresponding to the received command is set. (Step S1508). Note that a flag corresponding to the special symbol designation command (the lottery result) is also set in steps S1507 and S1508.

  Subsequently, an effect display schedule data update process which is a part of the scheduler update process (FIG. 210: step S1020) of the peripheral control unit steady process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display schedule data update process is a process of updating schedule data that defines the content of screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to realize a display effect to be displayed in response to a change in special symbols. In the effect display schedule data update process, as shown in FIG. 232, any one of steps S1610 to S1640 is performed according to the progress state of the game. Specifically, in response to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) receiving from the main control board 4100 a command at the start of change (for example, a special figure synchronization effect start command), the process of step S1610 is performed. Executed. In response to receiving the command for stopping the change, the process of step S1620 is executed. In response to receiving a command (for example, a special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) instructing the start of a pre-reading effect, the process of step S1630 is executed. The process of step S1640 is executed in response to receiving a command (for example, a jackpot start command) for progressing the jackpot game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1610), if a special symbol synchronization effect start command is received, a setting for starting the variable symbol variation display is performed. Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the special symbol synchronization effect start command and the special symbol designation command, and the notice effect is set. Then, the schedule data is updated so as to execute the determined decoration symbol variation and the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1620), the schedule data is updated so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped when the special symbol synchronization effect end command instructing the variation stop is received.

  In the pre-reading effect process (step S1630), the schedule data is updated so as to realize the pre-reading effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the speaker 130 in accordance with the special symbol storage pre-reading effect command received from the main control board 4100. Various effects can be adopted as the pre-reading effects. For example, when displaying special symbol hold on the display screen 1900d of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to employ an effect of changing the display mode to a mode different from the normal mode. For example, when a character representing special symbol hold is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character is displayed from a normal character using a variable display pattern represented by a start opening prize command (result of a preceding determination process). It is possible to adopt an effect of changing to a specific character determined by In addition, an effect of changing from a normal character to a specific character determined using a result of a special lottery represented by a start opening prize command (result of a preceding determination process) may be adopted. In addition, an effect of displaying a specific image (for example, a specific background image or a decorative design decorated with a specific decorative image) different from the normal image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be adopted as the prefetching effect. The display of such a specific image may be continued until the change based on the special symbol hold that is the target of the prefetch effect is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command for the first special symbol during the big hit game and in the external advantageous state. In a disadvantageous state, a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command can be transmitted. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command for the second special symbol during the big hit game and in the external disadvantageous state, and in the external advantageous state, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. Commands can be sent. Whether or not to transmit the special symbol memory pre-reading effect command may be determined by lottery using random numbers. The main control MPU 4100a has a case where a pre-reading effect is performed (when a special symbol memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted) as compared to a case where a pre-reading effect is not performed (when a special symbol storage pre-reading effect command is not transmitted). It is preferable to determine whether or not to transmit a special symbol storage pre-reading effect command so that the probability of winning a jackpot in the special lottery for pre-reading is increased.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1640), in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100, a display indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state or a display during the jackpot gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Update the schedule data so that

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is not limited to steps S1610, S1620, S1630, and S1640 shown in FIG. 232, and can perform various controls according to the progress of the gaming state.

  Next, in the decorative symbol variation start process, as shown in FIG. 233, first, it is determined whether or not a reception flag indicating that a special figure synchronization effect start command has been received is set (step S1701). The variable display pattern reception flag is set in step S1504 of the reception command analysis process (FIG. 231) described above. In step S1701, if this reception flag is not set (NO), it is determined that the special figure tuning effect start command has not been received, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if this reception flag is set (YES in step S1701), this reception flag is reset (step S1702), and the variation display pattern specified by the special figure synchronization effect start command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1703).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1703), a stop symbol that forms a missed symbol array that suggests a miss is determined (step S1705). If the variable display pattern is a winning pattern (YES in step S1703), a stop symbol that forms a big hit symbol arrangement that suggests a big hit is determined (step S1704).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the decoration pattern is displayed on the display screen 1900d of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in addition to the decoration pattern. This decoration symbol changes with the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the stop mode of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and 1: 1. The decorative pattern is composed of a combination of figures such as a circle, a cross, and a sakaku, for example, and a combination that suggests a big hit, a combination that suggests a small hit, and a combination that suggests a loss are set in advance. That is, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, any combination symbol out of a plurality of combinations set as a big hit mode of the decorative symbol is determined as a stop symbol.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a notice selection process for determining whether or not to perform a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1706), and then an effect pattern and an effect time (fluctuation) based on the change display pattern. Time), the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and the schedule data is updated so as to realize the display effect according to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1704 and S1705. The process ends (step S1707). Based on the schedule data updated in step S1707, drawing data for display effects is generated on the built-in VRAM in the display data creation process (FIG. 210: step S1030) described above. Then, drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the display data output process (FIG. 210: step S1016) described above. As a result, the decorative display variable display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the end of the special figure synchronization effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the schedule data so as to stop the variation display of the decorative symbols. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Also, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1707, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after the notice pattern is read. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decoration symbol is erroneously started in the next decoration pattern change display from being executed.

  It should be noted that various effects can be adopted as the notice effect. For example, an effect of displaying a specific message on the display screen 1900d of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be employed. Further, an effect of displaying a specific moving image on the display screen 1900d may be employed. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the effect | action which a movable accessory (for example, back lower right decoration unit 3250) operate | moves.

  In addition, in step S1706, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the notice effect so that the probability that the winning effect is won is higher when the notice effect is performed than when the notice effect is not performed. It is preferable to determine whether or not.

[12-4. Explanation of normal symbol variation processing]
Next, normal symbol variation processing executed by the above-described main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal symbol start detection process. FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal symbol processing. The processes in FIGS. 234 and 235 are realized by repeating the process in FIG. 190.

  The normal symbol start detection process of FIG. 234 is a process executed as a part of the switch input process (S74) in the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 190) described above, and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2750. This is a process of determining whether or not the lottery is on hold and updating the lottery hold state when the pass is made.

  First, in step SF41, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the gate switch 2751 of the gate unit 2750. When the detection signal is not output (SF41: No), the normal symbol start detection process is terminated.

  When the detection signal is output (SF41: Yes), in step SF42, various random numbers for normal symbol lottery (for example, random numbers for determination per normal symbol, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern) are acquired, and main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of holds in the input information storage area (gate information storage area) provided in the built-in RAM is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4). If the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, the various random numbers obtained are stored as gate information in the input information storage area (gate information storage area) (step SF43). The newly stored gate information is stored in the lowest numbered section among the empty sections in the four sections of the 0th to third sections. Also, in this step SF43, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored information as a holding ball, and the output information described above is output as output information. Store in the storage area.

  If the number of holds has reached the upper limit value in step SF42, the normal symbol start detection process is terminated without executing step SF43.

  The normal symbol processing of FIG. 235 shows an example of processing realized by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (S88) in the above-described main control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 190).

  In step SF51, it is determined whether or not the number of holds in the input information storage area (gate information storage area) provided in the main control built-in RAM is zero. When the number of holds is zero (SF51: Yes), the process proceeds to step SF55 described later. If the number of reservations is not zero, it is determined in step SF52 whether or not the normal symbol can be changed, that is, whether or not the normal symbol (normal symbol display 1189) is being displayed. When the normal symbol variation display is being performed (SF52: No), the process proceeds to step SF55 described later.

  If the normal symbol variation display is not in progress, the normal symbol hold storage transition processing is executed in step SF53. In this process, gate information (various random numbers) is read from the 0th section of the input information storage area (gate information storage area) provided in the main control built-in RAM, and set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The Then, the gate information of the first section is shifted to the zeroth section, the gate information of the second section is shifted to the first section, the gate information of the third section is shifted to the second section, and the third section is It becomes a new empty section. In step SF53, the lighting state of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is controlled so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of gate information after the shift as a holding ball.

  In the next step SF54, the normal lottery (normal symbol lottery) is performed using the gate information (normal symbol random number for determination per symbol) set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the winning probability of the normal symbol when the time-shortening function is operating is higher than the winning probability of the normal symbol when the time-shortening function is not operating. For example, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the normal symbol winning probability is 1/100, and when the time-shortening function is activated, the normal symbol winning probability is 99/100.

  Furthermore, the variation display pattern of the normal symbol is determined using the gate information (normal symbol variation display pattern random number) set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, according to the determined variation display pattern, the variation display of the normal symbol display 1189 is performed. Note that the normal symbol variation time (the time from the start to the end of variation display) is shorter when the time reduction function is activated than when the time reduction function is not activated. For example, the variation time when the time reduction function is not activated is 10 seconds, and the variation time when the time reduction function is activated is 0.5 seconds.

  In step SF55, according to the result of the normal symbol lottery and the variation display pattern of the normal symbol, commands related to the normal symbol display 1189 (for example, a general symbol synchronization production start command, a universal symbol designation command, and a general symbol synchronization production). End command and change state specification command) are set. As described above, the transmission (setting) timing of each command is determined for each command.

  In the next step SF56, the operation of the movable piece 2105 is controlled according to the result of the normal symbol lottery. The control pattern of the movable piece 2105 is determined in advance according to the result of the normal symbol lottery. For example, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is “off”, the movable piece 2105 is maintained in the closed state. When the result of the normal symbol lottery is “winning”, the movable piece 2105 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the opening time of the movable piece 2105 per one time is longer when the time reduction function is activated than when the time reduction function is not activated. For example, the opening time when the time reduction function is not operating is 0.2 seconds, and the opening time when the time reduction function is operating is 10 seconds. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the movable piece 2105 is opened when the normal symbol lottery result is “winning” is one time regardless of whether or not the time shortening function is activated. is there. Various other patterns can be adopted as the operation pattern of the movable piece 2105. For example, when the normal symbol lottery is won during the time-shortening function operation, the movable piece 2105 may be opened a plurality of times. Further, there may be a plurality of hits with different operation patterns of the movable piece 2105. In any case, the operation pattern is determined so that when the time reduction function is activated, the ease of winning a prize at the lower start port 2102 is improved compared to when the time reduction function is not activated. Is done. The operation of the movable piece 2105 is realized after the normal symbol variation display is completed.

[12-5. Explanation of production pattern, explanation of win type and variation display pattern table]
Next, an example of an effect pattern realized by the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines the effect pattern based on the variation display pattern determined by the main control board 4100. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a advances the effect according to the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs sound from the speaker by outputting a control signal (sound command) to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and outputs a drive command to the motor drive board 3042, thereby producing an effect. The movable combination (for example, the back lower right effect unit 3200 (FIG. 139)) is operated and drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the table migration table TI. In step S4002 of FIG. 224, a variation display pattern table (reference table) to be referred to is selected according to this table migration table TI. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can use the tables A to G. The variation display pattern table to be referred to is selected from the tables A to G. The selected variation display pattern table is determined according to the type of the last jackpot (special lottery jackpot) and the number of changes after the last jackpot game. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special lottery includes 13 types of big hits A to M and small hits.

  The part shown in FIG. 236 of the table transition table TI is a reference table in the case of winning in the first starting port 2101 in the normal external disadvantage state, that is, when winning in the special lottery regarding the first special symbol. Show. An illustration of the transition table relating to other gaming states and winning of the second special symbol is omitted.

  In the table migration table TI of FIG. 236, one row shows one type of hit. In one row, from left to right, the hit type, probability (whether or not the probability variation function is activated after the end of the winning game), time reduction (number of fluctuations in which the time reduction function is activated (number of special lotteries)) And are shown. The “next time” time reduction count indicates that the operation of the time reduction function continues until the next jackpot is won. On the right side of the number of time reductions, a plurality of divisions according to the type of table and the game state are shown. One division is associated with a specific table and a specific game state. Here, “high accuracy” indicates that the probability variation function operates, and “low accuracy” indicates that the probability variation function does not operate. “Time saving” indicates that the time saving function is activated, and “no time saving” indicates that the time saving function is not activated. The number (number range) shown for each division is the number of times of change (variation after winning game) that the gaming state associated with the division is realized by referring to the table associated with the division. Frequency). For example, in the case of winning the big hit B, the table C is referred to in the first to 30th changes after the big hit game, the table D is referred to in the 31st to 69th changes, and the 70th change. The table G is referred to, and the table A is referenced after the 71st time. In the first to the 70th variation, a gaming state of “low probability and shortness” (normally external advantageous state) is realized, and in the 71st and subsequent variations, a gaming state of “low probability and shortness” (normally external disadvantageous state). Is realized (the number of time reductions is 70 times).

  Next, each hit will be described. Here, for each win, the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the hit game, the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the hit game, the number of short times after the hit game, and the big hit probability after the hit game And will be explained. Next, the relationship between each hit will be described. The winning game is a game realized according to the special lottery, and includes the above-mentioned big hit game and the above-mentioned small hit game.

[Big hit A]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in a jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in a jackpot game: 1st time Number of short times after a jackpot game: 50 times Hit probability after a jackpot game: low probability here The first time is a time (for example, 20 seconds) that allows a plurality of (for example, nine) game balls to be able to win with a margin. Hereinafter, the opening of the opening / closing member 2106 over the first time is also referred to as “long opening”.

[Big hit B]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: 1st time Time after the jackpot game: 70 times Hit probability after the jackpot game: low probability

[Big hit C]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: First time Time after the jackpot game: 100 times Hit probability after the jackpot game: low probability

[Big hit D]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: 1st time Time after the jackpot game: 50 times Hit probability after the jackpot game: high accuracy

[Big hit E]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: First time Number of short times after the jackpot game: 70 times Hit probability after the jackpot game: high accuracy

[Big hit F]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: First time Time after the jackpot game: 100 times Hit probability after the jackpot game: high accuracy

[Big hit G]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: 1st time Short time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: High accuracy

[Big hit H]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: 1st time Short time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: High accuracy

[Big hit I]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: 1st time Short time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: High accuracy

[Big hit J]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: Second time Time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: Highly accurate The second time is a time that allows several (for example, one) game balls to barely win (for example, 0.5 seconds). Hereinafter, the opening of the opening / closing member 2106 over the second time is also referred to as “short opening”.

[Big hit K]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: Second time Time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: High accuracy

[Large hit L]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the jackpot game: 15 times Opening time per opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game: Second time Time after the jackpot game: Next time Jackpot probability after the jackpot game: High accuracy

[Big hit M]
Number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the big hit game: 2 Time of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 in the big hit game: second time Time after the big hit game: No time reduction However, in the gaming state where the probability variation function is activated, the jackpot M is won, and in the gaming state where the time reduction function is activated, the jackpot M is won until the next time.
Big hit probability after big hit game: High accuracy

[Small hit]
Number of times the opening and closing member 2106 is released in the small hit game: 2 Opening time per time of the opening and closing member 2106 in the small hit game: Second time Number of short times after the small hit game: The operating state of the short time function is small hit Same as before winning jackpot probability after small hit game: The operating state of the probability variation function is the same as before winning small hit

  Next, the relationship between each hit will be described. Here, the relationship regarding the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106, the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106, the number of short times after the winning game, and the big hit probability after the winning game will be described.

  The nine types of big hits A to I are the big hits with a lot of balls (the big hits with balls) since the opening / closing member 2106 is opened long in the big hit game. The other four types of big hits J to M are big hits (no big hits with no balls) because the open / close member 2106 is not opened long and the short opening is performed in the big hit game.

  The three types of big hits A to C are big hits where the probability variation function does not operate (normally big hits), and the other ten types of big hits D to M are big hits (probability change big hits) where the probability variation function operates.

  The three types of big hits D to F are the same as the three types of big hits A to C, respectively, except that the probability variation function operates.

  The three types of big hits G to I are the same as the three types of big hits D to F, respectively, except that the number of time reductions is “next time”.

  The three types of big hits J to L are the same as the three types of big hits G to I, respectively, except that the opening time per opening and closing member 2106 is the second time.

  The content of the winning game is the same between the big hit M and the small hit.

  The hit type is not limited to the type described above, and various other types of big hits may be implemented. For example, a big hit may be implemented such that the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 is changed from the first time to the second time or from the second time to the first time during the big hit game.

  Next, the relationship between the hit type and the variation display pattern will be described. As shown in the figure, for the big hits A, D, G, and J, the table B is referred to for the first to 49th variations after winning, and the table G is referred to for the 50th variation. Thus, in the first to 50th changes, the reference table transition mode (reference table associated with each change count) is the same among jackpots A, D, G, and J. That is, in the first to 50th changes after winning, even if any of these big hits A, D, G, J is won, the same change display pattern is selected. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between big hits A, D, G, and J only by observing the effects in the first to 50th changes after winning. A player who observes the effect of the 50th fluctuation (the effect of the table G) can enjoy the effect with a sense of expectation that “the time reduction function will continue without ending”. The reference tables after the 51st time are the table A for the big hits A and D for which the time saving function ends at the 50th time, but are the table B for the big hits G and J for which the time saving function continues until the next big hit. Hereinafter, these jackpots A, D, G, and J are also referred to as “common 50 jackpots”.

  For jackpots B, E, H, and K, Table C is referenced for the first to 30th variations after winning, Table D is referenced for the 31st to 69th variations, and for the 70th variation, Table G is referenced. In this way, in the first to 70th variations, the reference table transition mode is the same among jackpots B, E, H, and K. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to distinguish between big hits B, E, H, and K only by observing the effects in the first to 70th changes after winning. A player who observes the effect of the 70th variation (the effect of the table G) can enjoy the effect with a sense of expectation that “the time reduction function will continue without ending”. The reference tables after the 71st time are table A for jackpots B and E for which the time saving function ends at the 70th time, and table D for jackpots H and K for which the time saving function continues until the next jackpot. Hereinafter, these jackpots B, E, H, and K are also referred to as “common 70 jackpots”.

  Regarding the big hits C, F, I, and L, the table E is referred to in the first to 30th changes after the winning, the table F is referred to in the 31st to 99th changes, and in the 100th change, Table G is referenced. As described above, in the first to 100th variations, the transition mode of the reference table is the same among jackpots C, F, I, and L. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between big hits C, F, I, and L only by observing the effects in the first to 100th changes after winning. A player who observes the effect of the 100th variation (the effect of the table G) can enjoy the effect with a sense of expectation that “the time reduction function will continue without ending”. The reference tables after the 101st time are table A for jackpots C and F for which the time saving function ends at the 100th time, and table F for jackpots I and L for which the time saving function lasts until the next jackpot. Hereinafter, these jackpots C, F, I and L are also referred to as “common 100 jackpots”.

  Regarding the big hit M, after winning, the table A is referred to until the next big hit. Regarding the small hits, there is no change in the reference table due to the winning of the small hits.

  FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the comprehensive variation display pattern table HHT. This comprehensive variation display pattern table HHT is a table in which information on variation display patterns that can be used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is collected. The comprehensive variation display pattern table HHT includes tables A to G. In other words, each variation display pattern of the comprehensive variation display pattern table HHT belongs to at least one of the tables A to G.

  In the comprehensive variation display pattern table HHT in FIG. 237, one row shows one variation display pattern. One row is associated with the change display pattern number, the change name, the basic change time (unit: milliseconds), the winning (result of special lottery), and the number of pseudo-continuous effects in order from the left. Selection probability (unit: percent).

  The fluctuation display pattern number is a number unique to the fluctuation display pattern. The variation name is the name of the variation display pattern and represents the contents of the effect that can be realized. The basic variation time is a variation time when the pseudo-continuous production is not performed. The win represents the result of the special lottery. “X” indicates a disengagement, “Double circle” indicates a big hit with a protruding ball, “Square” indicates a big hit without a protruding ball, and “Triangle” indicates a small hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed 0 to 3 times. “Normal (10H)” in the figure indicates the probability of “0 times (no pseudo-continuous production)”, “Addition 1 (11H)” indicates the probability of “1 time”, and “Addition 2 (12H)” "Indicates the probability of" twice ", and" addition 3 (13H) "indicates the probability of" three times ". The selection probabilities corresponding to the number of pseudo-continuous effects are set separately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In the example of FIG. 237, for the special symbol 2, “normal (no pseudo-continuous effects)” is set to 100%. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time allocated to one pseudo-continuous performance is determined in advance (for example, 5 seconds). The variation time of the special symbol is set to a time obtained by adding, to the basic variation time, a time for the pseudo continuous effect (a value obtained by multiplying the number of the pseudo continuous effect by one pseudo continuous effect time). Note that the selection probability corresponding to the number of pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 237 indicates the selection probability when the table A is referred to in the normal external disadvantageous state. The selection probabilities in other cases are not shown.

  Here, the pseudo-continuous production will be described. As will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, there may be realized an effect of performing variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols in each of the plurality of decorative symbol regions on the display screen 1900d. The combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed suggests the result of the special lottery. The pseudo-continuous effect (also referred to as a pseudo-variable effect) is an effect in which after the decorative symbol is displayed, the player is shown to the player as if the decorative symbol has been changed, and the decorative symbol is displayed again. is there. The mode of the pseudo continuous effect may be various modes. For example, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in at least one decorative symbol region of the plurality of decorative symbol regions, and then the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol region. May be displayed in a variable manner. The decorative symbol may be a symbol representing a number, alphabet, symbol, character, or the like, and may be a symbol having a sufficient size that can be easily recognized by the player. The selection probability of the number of pseudo-continuous effects is determined in advance so that the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects, the higher the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit.

  FIG. 238 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the sorting table of Table A. This distribution table represents the selection probability of each variation display pattern. In the drawing, there is shown a distribution table in the case where the result of the special lottery is “out” and the result of the reach determination is “reach effect present”. The reach effect includes an effect that displays a so-called reach state, and an effect (post-reach effect) that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit after that. The reach state is a state expressed by an effect suggesting that the possibility of a big hit is high. For example, the same decorative design is stopped in the remaining decorative design regions excluding one of a plurality of decorative design regions. This is the state that is displayed.

  The distribution table of FIG. 238 corresponds to the reference table, the gaming state, and the special symbol type (special figure 1 shows the winning of the upper starting opening 2101 and special figure 2 shows the winning of the lower starting outlet 2102). Represents the selection probability (unit: percent) of each category a to m. Categories a to m indicate groups when a plurality of variable display patterns included in the table A are divided into a plurality of groups. In addition, this distribution table represents the selection probability (unit: percent) of the variable display pattern for each category a to m. For example, when a prize is awarded to the upper start port 2101 in a normal external disadvantageous state (no low accuracy), the selection probability of the category “a” is 36%, and “b” is 8% , “C” is 16%, “d” is 24%, “e” is 1%, “f” is 6%, “g” is 7%, and “h” is 1%. When category a is selected, the selection probability of the “10th” variable display pattern is 48%, “11th” is 6%, “15th” is 40%, “ “No. 16” is 6%. When the variable display pattern is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines the number of pseudo-continuous effects according to the total variable display pattern table HHT of FIG. For example, when the 10th variation display pattern is selected, the probability of 0 times (no pseudo-continuous effect) is 74%, and the probability of 1 time is 26%.

[12-6. Explanation of target explanation production]
FIG. 239 is an explanatory diagram of the target explanation effect. As shown in FIG. 236, for the common 70 big hits (big hit B, E, H, K) and the common 100 big hits (big hit C, F, I, L), Different tables are referred to between the 31st to the shortest shortest number of times −1 (69th or 99th). Here, the shortest number of times of shortening means the shortest number of fluctuations that the time shortening function can continue. The shortest number of times for the common 50 big hits is 50, the shortest number of times for the common 70 big hits is 70 times, and the shortest number of times for the common 100 big hits is 100 times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when either the common 70 big hit or the common 100 big hit is won, the target explanation effect is realized in the first to 30th fluctuations. And in the fluctuation | variation of the 31st time-shortest time shortest number -1-the effect (it also calls a target result effect) which derives | leads-out whether the target demonstrated by the target explanatory effect is achieved is performed. When the common 50 big hits are won, the target explanation effect is omitted, and the target result effect is realized in the first time to the shortest shortest number of times −1 variation (that is, the first to 49th variation). The target is different for each shortest number of times. That is, the first target is associated with the common 50 jackpots, the second target is associated with the common 70 jackpots, and the third target is associated with the common 100 jackpots. In addition, when one of the common 50 big hits, the common 70 big hits, and the common 100 big hits is won, the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIG. 128 until the shortest number of times is changed after the big hit game. The opened / closed member 2706 is opened, and the remaining number of fluctuations up to the shortest number of times is displayed on the 7-segment LED 2711b. The player can confirm the remaining number of fluctuations in which the time reduction function operates by observing the display of the 7-segment LED 2711b.

  Hereinafter, the effects will be described using an example of effects realized when winning the common 70 jackpot. In this case, the table C is referred to in the first to 30th changes. The table D is referred to in the 31st to 69th changes.

  FIG. 239 shows a display screen 1900d of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display screen 1900d is provided with a decorative symbol display area ZSZa, a holding display area ZHRa, and an effect area ZENa. In the decorative symbol display area ZSZa, three decorative symbol areas ZSa1, ZSa2, and ZSa3 are formed. In each of the areas ZSa1, ZSa2, and ZSa3, the decorative symbol is changed and stopped. In the hold display area ZHRa, a display representing the special symbol hold is performed. In the effect area ZENa, the target explanation effect ZME is displayed. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display area ZSZa is provided in a small corner in the display screen 1900d, and the effect area ZENa is larger than the decorative symbol display area ZSZa and occupies the central portion of the display screen 1900d. , Provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the target explanation effect ZME includes a moving image such as a movie, for example. Then, as the moving image progresses, the goal achieved by the effect realized when the big hit is suggested is explained. For example, the target explanation effect ZME is an effect representing a state in which a specific person enters a building, passes through a trap set in the building, and reaches a room where a hostage (companion) is present. A player who observes such a target explanation effect ZME can easily grasp that the goal is to escape from the building together with the hostage.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines the effect of each variation such that a plurality of variations (here, the first to 30th variations after winning) share a part of the target explanation effect ZME. In the example of FIG. 239, the target explanation effect ZME is divided into k partial effects ZMEp (1) to ZMEp (k) (k is, for example, 30). The effects Zt (1) to Zt (k) indicate the effects of fluctuations from the first time to the kth time. Peripheral control MPU 4150a assigns partial effects ZMEp (1) to ZMEp (k) to effects Zt (1) to Zt (k), respectively. Such effects are realized according to the table C.

  FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram illustrating a part of the sorting table of table C. In the drawing, a table is shown in the case where the result of the special lottery is “off” and the result of reach determination is “no reach production”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the table C is referred to, the reach determination in the case of shifting to the special lottery is “no reach effect”.

  As described with reference to FIG. 236, the gaming state in which the table C is referred to is an external advantageous state (time reduction function is activated). That is, since the movable piece 2105 is frequently opened and closed, the ease of winning a prize at the lower start port 2102 is improved. As shown in FIG. 240, when winning the lower start opening 2102 (see FIG. 2), category i (low probability) or category l (high probability) is selected. When the time is low (category i), the 203th display pattern is selected, and when the time is high (category l), the 206th display pattern is selected. As shown in FIG. 237, the basic variation time of both No. 203 and No. 206 is 2 seconds (not shown, but when the table C is referred to, the number of pseudo-continuous effects is zero. ).

  Further, in the gaming state in which the table C is referred to, the time saving function is activated, so that the game usually proceeds without interruption of the holding of the second special symbol. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a special figure synchronization effect start command for the next change from the main control board 4100 without a gap when a change time of a change ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continues to produce effects without any gap in the gaming state in which the table C is referred to (here, the first to 30th fluctuations).

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continuously implements the first to the thirty-time effects without leaving an interval. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continuously realizes the effects Zt (1) to Zt (k) shown in FIG. 239 without leaving a gap. Accordingly, the partial effects ZMEp (1) to ZMEp (k) are continuously realized without a gap. As a result, the whole from the start ZMEs to the end ZMEe of the target explanation effect ZME is realized continuously. The player can enjoy the target explanation effect ZME realized over a plurality of fluctuations without feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, as described above, the fluctuation time is the same in the first to 30th fluctuations. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can appropriately assign the partial effects to each variation by equally dividing the target explanation effect ZME into a plurality (here, 30 pieces) of partial effects.

  Here, since the fluctuation time of one fluctuation is a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds to 10 seconds. In this embodiment, 2 seconds), when the special lottery result of losing continues, It is possible to suppress spending time on people. In the first to 30th fluctuations, there is a margin in the remaining fluctuation times up to the number of fluctuations (here, 70 times) at which the time reduction function can be completed. Therefore, if the result of the special lottery is out of place, the player is more likely to want to know the result of the next special lottery without rushing. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time of one time is relatively short, when the result of the extra lottery continues, it is possible to suppress a plurality of fluctuations while suppressing spending time. By utilizing the whole, it is possible to realize the target explanation production ZME.

  Note that the fluctuation time of one fluctuation may be relatively long (for example, 10 seconds to 30 seconds). By doing so, the total time that can be spent on the target explanation effect is lengthened, so that a long effect can be adopted as the target explanation effect. For example, an effect in which a specific person overcomes various crises and searches for a treasure can be realized as a target explanation effect. In this way, an effect that attracts the player's interest like a movie can be realized as a target explanation effect, so that the player can enjoy the effect as if watching a movie.

  In addition, when the big win is won in the first to 30th changes, a change display pattern with reach effect is selected (not shown).

[12-7. Explanation of target result production]
FIG. 241 is an explanatory diagram of the target result effect. The target result effect is a display effect that can be realized in the variation from the 31st time to the shortest time reduction number -1. In the figure, the effects Zt (k + 1) to Zt (m) from the (k + 1) th time to the shortest number of time reductions m (here, k = 30, m = 70) are shown. Unlike the effect example of FIG. 239, these effects Zt (k + 1) to Zt (m) are realized independently of each other. FIG. 241 further shows a production flow and a change in the display image along the flow. The target result effect is realized according to the table D, for example.

  242 to 244 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a part of the sorting table of the table D. FIG. FIG. 242 is a sorting table that is referred to when the result of the special lottery is “out” and the reach determination is “no reach effect”. The number of holdings shown in the figure indicates the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 242, in the case of a loss of reach production, the category to be selected differs depending on the number of holds, and the variable display patterns 203 to 208 can be selected depending on the category. . As shown in FIG. 237, the fluctuation display patterns No. 203 to No. 208 are set to a time in which the basic fluctuation time is relatively short (in this case, one of 2 seconds, 8 seconds, and 15 seconds). Although illustration is omitted, the number of pseudo-continuous productions is zero when the reach production is out of reach. In this embodiment, the table C is set so that the smaller the number of holds, the longer the variation time.

  FIG. 243 is a sorting table that is referred to when the result of the special lottery is “out” and the reach determination is “reach effect present”. In this case, the selection probability of one category k is 100%, and the selection probability of the 220th variation display pattern is 100%. As shown in FIG. 237, the fluctuation name of the fluctuation display pattern of No. 220 is “mate rescue lose”. The content of this effect is an effect that shows a situation in which it tries to escape with a friend found in the target explanation effect but fails and needs to be redone.

  FIG. 241 shows a flow example of effects that can be realized when the 220th variation display pattern is selected. In the first step ZS200, the decorative symbol variation display starts on the display screen 1900d. As shown in the display example of step ZS210, the display screen 1900d is provided with a decorative symbol display area ZSZb and a hold display area ZHRa. The decorative symbol display area ZSZb is an area larger than the decorative symbol display area ZSZa of FIG. 239 and covers almost the entire display screen 1900d. In the decorative symbol display area ZSZb, three decorative symbol areas ZSb1, ZSb2, and ZSb3 are provided. In step ZS200, the decorative symbol variation display is started in each of the decorative symbol regions ZSb1, ZSb2, and ZSb3.

  In the next step ZS210, the reach state is displayed. In the example of FIG. 241, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol region ZSb1 and the third decorative symbol region ZSb3.

  In the next step ZS220, a mission effect is realized. In this state, similarly to the example of FIG. 239, the display screen 1900d is provided with a decorative symbol display area ZSZa and an effect area ZENa (the hold display area ZHRa is omitted). In the effect area ZENa, an effect (mission effect) for deriving whether or not the goal is achieved is realized. This effect is an effect in which, for example, a specific person searches for an escape route together with a friend discovered in the target explanation effect ZME.

  When the result of the special lottery is “out of” (step ZS225: No), in step ZS240, a failure effect is realized in the effect region ZENa. The failure effect is an effect in which, for example, a specific person and a friend find an exit, but start searching for another escape route without unlocking the exit door.

  In the next step ZS245, the decorative design suggesting the disengagement is stopped and displayed. For example, in the second decorative symbol region ZSb2 shown in the display example of step ZS210, a state in which a decorative symbol different from the other decorative symbol regions ZSb1 and ZSb3 is stopped and displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 244 is a sorting table that is referred to when the result of the special lottery is “winning”. In this case, when winning a winning big hit, category T is selected and the 222nd variation display pattern is selected. In the case of winning a winning big hit, the category U is selected and the 223th variation display pattern is selected. When winning a small hit, category V is selected and the 247th variation display pattern is selected.

  FIG. 241 shows a flow of effects in the case of winning a winning big hit. Steps ZS200 to ZS220 are the same as the effects in the case of the above-mentioned reach effect with reach effect. If the result of the special lottery is a specific hit (here, a big hit with a ball) (ZS225: Yes), a successful effect is realized in step ZS230. The successful performance is an effect in which, for example, a specific person and friends find an exit, open the exit door, and escape from the building. Here, the characters “success” may be displayed on the display screen 1900d.

In the next step ZS235, the decorative design suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed. For example, the decorative symbol display area ZSZb is displayed on the display screen 1900d. And
In all the decorative symbol areas ZSb1, ZSb2, and ZSb3, a state in which the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol areas ZSb1 and ZSb3 in step ZS210 is displayed.

  As described above, the target explanation effect is realized in correspondence with the first 30 lotteries among the 70 lotteries (variations) that can be performed in the external advantageous state. Thus, the target explanation effect is realized in a state where there is a margin in the remaining number of lotteries in the external advantageous state. Therefore, the player can observe the target explanation effect in a state where the feeling of frustration is small, such as “the external advantageous state ends without winning a win”. Here, the target explanation effect is configured to explain a target for suggesting a specific hit (for example, a big hit with a ball) through 30 display effects. Although such an effect of explaining is performed through 30 display effects, the feeling of frustration is small as described above, so the player can calm down and observe 30 display effects (target explanation effect). . As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the target.

  Further, in the 31st and subsequent lotteries, a target result effect including a mission effect that derives whether or not the target is achieved can be realized. Since the target result effect is realized in a state where the number of remaining lotteries in the external advantageous state is small, the feeling of frustration of the player is higher than the state where the target explanation effect is realized. However, since the player has already properly grasped the target as described above, the player can play the game while expecting the winning lottery result by observing the target result presentation without being impatient or confused. Can proceed.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 239, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the 30 display effects Zt (1) to Zt (k (30)) so that the 30 display effects are partially shared by the target explanation effect ZME. Determine each of the. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a realizes the target explanation effect ZME as a whole in a series of 30 effects by realizing the determined 30 effects. Therefore, the target explanation effect can be realized while increasing the degree of freedom of each of the 30 effects. For example, if the time of the display effect realized corresponding to one lottery is shortened, it is possible to realize the target explanation effect while suppressing spending time. In addition, if the time of the display effect realized corresponding to one lottery is lengthened, the target explanation effect can be realized along a long scenario that cannot be realized by the display effect of one lottery.

  Such a target explanation effect is realized in correspondence with the first partial lottery (here, 30 lotteries) among the 70 lotteries that can be performed in the external advantageous state. Therefore, the player can observe the display effect 30 times in a state where the feeling of frustration is small.

  As described above, the player can calmly enjoy the target explanation effect realized over 30 display effects, and appropriately observe the effect (target explanation effect) calmly. The target can be grasped.

  Further, when realizing the target explanation effect, the target is described using the remaining part of the display screen 1900d while displaying the fluctuating decorative symbols smaller than when realizing the target result effect. Display effects can be advanced by further displaying images. Also, when realizing the target result effect, the display effect using the decorative symbol change display and stop display is advanced by displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol larger than when realizing the target explanation effect. Is possible.

  According to this configuration, in the target explanation effect, the fluctuating decorative symbols are displayed smaller than the target result effect, and an image for explaining the target is further displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the display effect using the image from being disturbed by the decorative design. In addition, since the target explanation effect is realized in a state where there is a margin in the number of remaining lotteries in the external advantageous state, even if the result of the lottery is lost, the player can perform the target explanation effect with a margin. Can be observed. A player who can observe the production with a margin can fully enjoy the production using the image for explaining the goal without being disturbed by the decorative design.

  On the other hand, the target result effect is realized in a state where the number of remaining lotteries in the external advantageous state is smaller than the target explanation effect. Therefore, when the target result presentation is realized, the player strongly feels a sense of expectation (an interest in the lottery result) that he wants to win the winning as soon as possible. Here, in the target result effect, if the decorative symbol is displayed small like the target explanation effect, it is difficult to see the decorative symbol that can notify the lottery result, and the player may feel stress. . However, in the above-described configuration, in the target result effect, the display effect using the change display and stop display of the decorative symbol can proceed by displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol larger than the target explanation effect. That is, in the target result effect, a decorative symbol capable of notifying the lottery result that is highly interested by the player is displayed large. As a result, the player's stress is alleviated, so that the player can advance the game while enjoying the display effect.

  In addition, the target explanation effect ZME is realized in a gaming state in which the movable piece 2105 operates in an operation mode in which the time reduction function is activated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the production will be interrupted during the target explanation production ZME.

  It should be noted that various effects can be adopted as effects in the case where the 31st to 69th special lotteries are won with no big hit or small hit. For example, in the case of winning a winning big hit, the same effect may be realized as in the case of winning a big hit big hit. Further, when winning a small hit, the same effect as in the case of losing may be realized.

  As described above, the case where the common 70 jackpot is won has been described, but also when the common 100 jackpot is won, the target explanation effect and the target result effect are realized. Note that the shortest number of times is not limited to 70 and 100, but may be any other value.

[12-8. Explanation of production in the variation corresponding to the shortest number of times]
Next, an effect in the variation corresponding to the shortest time reduction (hereinafter also referred to as “last time variation”) will be described. In the following, description will be made by taking as an example a case where a common 70 big hit is won. As described with reference to FIG. 236, when the common 70 jackpot is won, an effect in the last short fluctuation (that is, an effect in the 70th fluctuation) is realized according to the table G. 245 and 246 are schematic diagrams illustrating a part of the sorting table of the table G. FIG. FIG. 245 shows a table when the result of the special lottery is “off”, and FIG. 246 shows a table when the result of the special lottery is “win”.

  As shown in FIG. 245, when the result of the special lottery is “out of”, the 227th variation display pattern is selected. As shown in FIG. 237, the variable name of No. 227 is “Last Chance Loss”.

  As shown in FIG. 246, when the result of the special lottery is “winning”, the category to be selected differs depending on the type of winning. When the winning ball hits A to I are won, the category W is selected and the 228th variation display pattern is selected. In the case where the winning ball hits J to M are won, the category X is selected and the 229th variation display pattern is selected. When winning a small hit, category Y is selected and the 249th variation display pattern is selected. As shown in FIG. 237, the fluctuation name of No. 228 when winning a winning big hit is “Last Chance Same Design”. The name of the change of No. 229 in the case of winning the Idama No. Bonus is “Last chance specific probability change”. The winning name for No. 249 when winning a small win is “Last Chance Small Win”.

  As described above, the variable display patterns of the table G all show an effect having “last chance” as a common motif. As such an effect, for example, it is possible to display an effect that displays a state in which the door is closed, and later opens the door and displays a result indicating a special lottery or the content of the effect after the next time. The peripheral control MPU 4150a uses various commands received from the main control board 4100 in the last short time fluctuation (for example, the 70th fluctuation after winning the common 70 big hits), and the change display pattern and the last big hit Depending on the type and the result of the special lottery in the variation, the effect content of the variation and the effect content of the variation after the next time are determined. Specifically, the contents of the effect are determined as follows.

[Case A] When the last jackpot is a jackpot in which the time reduction function ends with the fluctuation and the probability fluctuation function does not operate (for example, when the jackpot B is won)
1) When the lottery result of the fluctuation is lost or small hit The fluctuation: high / low transition production, next time: high / low production 2) When the lottery result of the fluctuation is no big hit, the fluctuation: short-time continuous transition Production, next time: Short-time continuation production 3) When the lottery result of the change is a big hit with a ball
Fluctuation: Relief production, Next time: Production according to the type of jackpot

[Case B] When the last jackpot is a jackpot where the time-shortening function ends with the fluctuation and the probability fluctuation function is activated (for example, when the jackpot E is won)
1) When the lottery result of the variation is lost or small hit Pattern a) The variation: High / low transition effect, Next time: High / low effect Pattern b) The variation: High accuracy transition effect, Next time: High accuracy effect 2 ) If the lottery result of the fluctuation is a big hit with no ball, the fluctuation: Short-time continuous transition effect, Next time: Short-time continuous effect 3) If the lottery result of the fluctuation is a big hit with a ball:
Fluctuation: Relief production, Next time: Production according to the type of jackpot

[Case C] When the last jackpot is a jackpot in which the short-time function continues until the next jackpot and the probability variation function is activated (for example, when jackpot H or K is won)
1) When the lottery result of the change is lost or small hit The change: continuous production, the next time: Same as the 31st to 69th production 2) When the lottery result of the fluctuation is a big hit The fluctuation: short-time continuous transition production, next time and after: short-time continuous production 3) When the lottery result of the fluctuation is an out-dated big hit:
Fluctuation: Relief production, Next time: Production according to the type of jackpot

  “High-low effect” is an effect that can be realized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a when the variable display pattern of the table A is selected in a state where the time-shortening function is not activated, and the probability of winning a special lottery can be high. It is a production that suggests that there is sex. In the high / low effect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a closes the opening / closing member 2706 described with reference to FIG. The “high / low transition effect” is an effect indicating that the high / low effect is realized from the next change. In each of the above-described case A (normal big hit) and case B (probable big hit), high and low effects can be realized. Therefore, when the high and low effects are realized, the probability variation function may be activated. . Therefore, when the transition from high to low is realized with the shortest time fluctuation, the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that the probability fluctuation function may be activated by the fluctuation after the next time. I can enjoy it. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can realize high and low effects according to the change display pattern of the table A in a plurality of continuous changes following the stop of the time reduction function. However, when the actual jackpot probability is low, the realization of the high / low production is stopped according to the realization of the high / low production determined in accordance with the random number, and the fluctuation of the table A is displayed in the subsequent fluctuations. A normal performance according to the pattern is realized. In the case where the actual jackpot probability is high, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may continue the high and low effects until the jackpot is won. Instead, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may perform a lottery using random numbers for each variation, and when winning the lottery, may realize an effect that suggests that the big hit probability is high.

  “Time-saving continuation effect” is an effect that can be realized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a when the variable display pattern of the table A is selected in a state where the time-saving function is operating, and the operation of the time-saving function is until the next big hit winning This is an effect that suggests continuing. In the time-shortening effect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a opens the opening / closing member 2706 (FIG. 128) and uses the 7-segment LED 2711b to display that the time-shortening function continues until the next big hit (for example, “999” ”). The “short time continuous transition effect” is an effect indicating that the short time continuous effect is realized from the next change. When the short-time continuous transition effect is realized with the last short-time fluctuation, the player understands that the short-time function will continue even in the next and subsequent fluctuations, and can play the game happily without being impatient.

  The “relief effect” is an effect indicating that the goal described in the target explanation effect has been achieved. When the relief effect is realized with the shortest fluctuation, the player can easily understand that the goal has been achieved, that is, that the player has won the jackpot.

  In the case B described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects either the pattern a or the pattern b according to the lottery using random numbers when the lottery result of the change is lost or small hit. .

[12-9. Explanation of production during the big hit game]
FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect during a big hit game. In the figure, an effect in a jackpot game in which the long opening of the opening / closing member 2106 is performed 15 times is shown (for example, a jackpot game in the case of winning a winning big hit game). In the drawing, effects Zr (1) to Zr (n) that are sequentially realized n times are shown (where n = 15). Each effect Zr (1) to Zr (n) corresponds to each of 15 times of opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 (round). For example, the second effect Zr (2) is an effect realized during the second round.

  In the example of FIG. 247, in the effects Zr (1) to Zr (3) in the first to third rounds, a normal effect (for example, an effect introducing characters appearing in the reach effect) is realized on the display screen 1900d. Is done. Further, during the realization of these effects Zr (1) to Zr (3), the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs color LED 430b (FIG. 47) of the dial decoration board 430 or color LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 at a specific timing. Is temporarily emitted. When the player does not operate the pressing operation unit 405 during light emission (step ZS100: No), in the subsequent fourth to thirteenth effects Zr (4) to Zr (n-2), the display screen 1900d Thus, a general effect unrelated to the goal of the target result effect that can be realized later is realized (step ZS120, for example, an effect of introducing a character appearing in the reach effect). In the 14th effect Zr (n−1), three candidate images corresponding to the common 50 jackpots, the common 70 jackpots, and the common 100 jackpots are displayed on the display screen 1900d, and the displayed candidate images are displayed. An effect of selecting one candidate image from the above is realized (step ZS122. For example, a roulette effect). In the last effect Zr (n), a character string (for example, a title representing a target) associated with one selected candidate image (a candidate image associated with the jackpot of the lottery result) is displayed on the display screen 1900d. The displayed effect is realized (step ZS124).

  When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 during light emission (step ZS100: Yes), the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays an image prompting the player for fingerprint authentication (referred to as an “authentication promotion image”) on the display screen. It is displayed on 1900d (step ZS102). The authentication promotion image may be various images that prompt the player to perform fingerprint authentication, and includes, for example, a message “Perform fingerprint authentication”. The image prompting the fingerprint authentication is displayed for a predetermined time from the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  If the player does not bring an object such as a finger close to the detection port 2701a (object detection sensor 2702) described in FIG. 128 while the authentication promotion image is displayed (step ZS104: No), the peripheral control is performed. The MPU 4150a displays an image indicating authentication failure on the display screen 1900d (step ZS106). And the effect of step ZS120-ZS124 is implement | achieved similarly to the case where a player does not operate the press operation part 405 during light emission.

  When the player brings an object such as a finger close to the detection port 2701a (object detection sensor 2702) while the authentication promotion image is displayed (step ZS104: Yes), the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the display screen 1900d. Then, an image indicating the authentication success is displayed (step ZS108). Then, in the subsequent fourth to fourteenth effects Zr (4) to Zr (n-1), an effect is described on the display screen 1900d that explains the goal of the target result effect that can be realized after the big hit game (step) ZS110). Then, in the last effect Zr (n), an effect in which a character string (title) representing the target is displayed on the display screen 1900d is realized (step ZS114).

  As described above, the player can obtain an opportunity for fingerprint authentication by operating the pressing operation unit 405 at a specific timing, and further, by performing fingerprint authentication, the player can obtain the target, that is, the shortest time. You can know the number of time savings. Therefore, by realizing the effect as shown in FIG. 247, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the effect. As a result, the player can positively enjoy the performance even during the big hit game. In the effect of fingerprint authentication, the player's fingerprint is not actually authenticated, but the effect of authentication success is realized by the object detection sensor 2702 detecting the approach of an object such as a finger.

[12-10. Explanation of production flow example]
FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing an example of effects that can be realized on the display screen 1900d. As described above, when the variable display pattern of the table A is selected, effects such as a target explanation effect, a target result effect, and a height effect can be realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects can be further realized when the variation display pattern of the table A is selected. Hereinafter, some of the effects that can be realized will be described.

  First, an effect according to the fluctuation display pattern of No. 53 (out of line) or No. 54 (outgoing big hit) in FIG. 237 is described. In the first step ZS300, the decoration pattern starts to change. For example, a decorative symbol display area ZSZb as shown in FIG. 241 is displayed on the display screen 1900d, and the decorative symbols start variably displaying in each of the three decorative symbol areas ZSb1, ZSb2, and ZSb3. In the next step ZS310, the reach state is displayed. For example, the reach state is displayed as in the display example of step ZS210 in FIG.

  In the next step ZS313, the first specific derivation effect is realized. The first specific derivation effect is an effect for deriving whether or not a first specific effect to be described later is performed. In the present embodiment, in the first specific derivation effect, the cylindrical decorative body 3250b shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 moves from a standing state (normal state) to a substantially horizontal state (appearing state). It is a production that suggests the possibility of doing. For example, in the first specific derivation effect, the decoration body 3250b temporarily vibrates, and an LED (not shown) provided on the decoration body 3250b blinks. Then, on the display screen 1900d, a display effect in which the vicinity of the decoration main body 3250b shines is realized.

  In the next step ZS316, the first specific effect is realized. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, in the first specific effect, the decoration main body 3250b moves from a standing state (normal state) to a substantially horizontal state (appearing state), and the display screen 1900d. Then, a display effect representing the appearance of a large explosion is realized.

  In the next step ZS319, the second type lottery result derivation effect is realized. The second type lottery result derivation effect is an effect for deriving the result of the special lottery. For example, in the case of winning a big hit, an effect representing how a specific person succeeds in the operation is realized. In the case of losing, an effect representing how a specific person fails in the operation is realized.

  Hereinafter, in this way, the first specific derivation effect is realized, the first specific effect is realized after the first specific derivation effect, and the effect suggesting the result of the special lottery is realized after the first specific effect. The effect pattern is also referred to as a first type effect pattern ZPT1.

  Next, the production according to the fluctuation display patterns of No. 21 (displacement) and No. 23 (outgoing big hit) in FIG. 237 will be described. Steps ZS300 to ZS313 are the same as the 53rd and 54th effect patterns described above. In the 21st and 23rd effect patterns, the first specific effect (ZS316) is not realized, and the first-type lottery result derivation effect is realized (step ZS329). The first type lottery result derivation effect is an effect for deriving the result of the special lottery. For example, when a big hit is won, an effect representing how a specific person meets a target person is realized. In the case of losing, an effect that represents a situation in which a specific person passes by without meeting the target person is realized.

  Hereinafter, after the first specific derivation effect is realized, the first specific effect is not realized after the first specific derivation effect, and the second specific derivation effect described later is not realized. The effect pattern that ends is also referred to as a fourth type effect pattern ZPT4.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second type lottery result derivation effect is realized, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than when the first type lottery result derivation effect is realized. Thus, the selection probability of each variation display pattern is set. Therefore, when the first specific derivation effect (ZS313) is realized, the player can enjoy the transition of the effect while expecting an explosion (first specific effect) to occur.

  Next, effects according to the variation display patterns of No. 114 (out of line) and No. 115 (outgoing big hit) in FIG. 237 will be described. In step ZS330 subsequent to step ZS300, a chance is displayed on the display screen 1900d instead of the reach state. The chance is a combination of a plurality of predetermined decorative symbols (for example, a combination of “4”, “7”, and “3”). Although the combination suggests a loss rather than a win, in the production according to the fluctuation display pattern of No. 114 and No. 115, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate again after the chance stop display, and the production continues. .

  In the next step ZS333, the first specific derivation effect is realized in the same manner as in the above-described step ZS313. Subsequent steps ZS336 and ZS339 are the same as steps ZS316 and ZS319, respectively.

  The effect patterns corresponding to the 114th and 115th variable display patterns are also examples of the first type effect pattern ZPT1 in the same manner as the effect patterns corresponding to the 53rd and 54th variable display patterns described above.

  Next, effects according to the variable display patterns of No. 113 (big hit M) and No. 244 (small hit) in FIG. 237 will be described. Steps ZS300 to ZS33 are the same as the 114th and 115th effect patterns described above. In the 113th and 244th effect patterns, the first specific effect (ZS336) is not realized. However, the second specific derivation effect is realized before the effect for deriving the lottery result (step ZS343). The second specific derivation effect is an effect for deriving whether or not a second specific effect described later is realized. In the present embodiment, as the second specific derivation effect, an effect is shown in which a water tank is displayed on the display screen 1900d and a crack (crack) is generated in the water tank.

  In the next step ZS346, the second specific effect is realized. In the present embodiment, the second specific effect is an effect of displaying on the display screen 1900d a state in which a cracked aquarium breaks and a specific person escapes through the cracked aquarium. In the subsequent step ZS349, a third-type lottery result derivation effect is realized. In the present embodiment, the third type lottery result derivation effect is an effect that suggests an effect that can be realized from the next fluctuation and a result of the special lottery. From the next fluctuation, for example, the above-described height effect may be realized. Thus, since the same effect is realized between the big hit M (No. 113) and the small hit (No. 244), it is difficult for the player to determine which win has been won. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while having a sense of expectation that the jackpot probability is high.

  Hereinafter, after the first specific derivation effect is realized, the second specific derivation effect is realized without realizing the first specific derivation effect after the first specific derivation effect. An effect pattern in which the second specific effect is realized later is referred to as a third type effect pattern ZPT3.

  Next, an effect according to the 112th (out of) variation display pattern of FIG. 237 will be described. Steps ZS300 to ZS343 are the same as the No. 113 and No. 244 effect patterns described above. In No. 112, the second specific effect (ZS346) is not realized, and the losing derivation effect is realized (ZS359). In the lose derivation effect, the decorative symbol display area ZSZb as shown in FIG. 241 is displayed on the display screen 1900d, and the three decorative symbols of the combination suggesting the detachment are stopped and displayed (for example, the chance eye displayed in step ZS330). combination).

  Hereinafter, after the first specific derivation effect is realized, the second specific derivation effect is realized without realizing the first specific derivation effect after the first specific derivation effect. An effect pattern that ends the effect without realizing the second specific effect later is referred to as a second type effect pattern ZPT2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first to third type effect patterns ZPT1 to ZPT3 can be realized. Therefore, when the first specific derivation effect is realized, but the first specific effect is not realized, the most advantageous out-of-ball hit big hit out of the big hit big hit, the big hit M, and the small hit. Although the possibility disappears, there is still a possibility that the second specific derivation effect will be realized. And if a 2nd specific production | presentation is implement | achieved after the 2nd specific derivation production is implement | achieved, there is a possibility of a big hit M or a small hit. Therefore, even if the first specific effect is not realized, the player can enjoy the subsequent effects while feeling the expectation of the possibility of realizing the second specific effect. Furthermore, when the second specific performance is realized, there is a possibility of both big hits M and small hits having different advantages. Therefore, when the second specific effect is realized without realizing the first specific effect, the player has a desire to “determine which of the big hit M or the small win is won” The game can proceed. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a fourth type effect pattern ZPT4 can be realized in addition to the first type to third type effect patterns ZPT1 to ZPT3. Accordingly, when the first specific derivation effect is realized but the first specific derivation effect is not realized, the second specific derivation effect is not realized, and there is a possibility that the effect ends. Therefore, when the first specific effect is not realized, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the second specific derivation effect is desired, and when the second specific derivation effect is realized, It is possible to provide the player with the joy of being able to realize the second specific derivation effect! Thus, since the enjoyment obtained by observing the performance is improved, the player can progress the game more happily.

  Note that the first type that can be suggested by the first type effect pattern ZPT1 is not limited to a big hit with a ball, but it may be a probable big hit or a probable big hit with a ball, or other various hits. May be. The second type that can be suggested by the third type production pattern ZPT3 is not limited to the indeterminate big hit, but may be a big hit or a normal big hit, and other various hits. There may be. The third type hit that can be suggested by the third type effect pattern ZPT3 is not limited to the small hit, but may be an indeterminate big hit or other various hits.

  In the present embodiment, the selection probability of the variable display pattern that realizes the first specific derivation effect is set as follows. That is, the selection probability of the variable display pattern is set so that the probability of a big hit is increased when the first specific effect is realized as compared to the case where the first specific effect is not realized. Therefore, when the first specific derivation effect is realized, the player can enjoy the effect while expecting the first specific effect to be realized.

  The first specific effect is not limited to the above effects, and may be various effects. For example, it may be an effect that the movable decorative body operates. Instead of the movable decorative body operating, a display effect in which a specific display is performed on the display screen 1900d may be used. The first specific derivation effect is not limited to the above-mentioned effects, and various effects that derive whether or not the first specific effect is performed can be employed. For example, various effects suggesting the first specific effect can be adopted as the first specific derivation effect. Similarly, for the second specific effect and the second specific derivation effect, various effects (various effects different from the first specific effect and the first specific derivation effect) can be employed.

[13. Aspects extracted from the present embodiment (technical thought)]
Hereinafter, various technical ideas extracted by viewing this embodiment from various viewpoints will be described.

[Technical ideas extracted by paying attention to the number of fluctuations after winning games]
The following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted by looking at the present embodiment by paying attention to “the number of fluctuations after winning a game”.

[Aspect 1]
A gaming machine,
Passing means configured to allow game media to pass through;
Lottery information acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information used in the lottery in response to the game medium passing through the passage means;
Using the lottery information, a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win,
Means that can be realized by selecting one gaming state from a plurality of types of gaming states including a first type gaming state and a second type gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first type gaming state. In the case where the lottery is won for at least a part of the winnings, after winning the winning part, N times (N is an integer of 3 or more) until the lottery is performed. Game state realization means capable of switching from the second type gaming state to the first type gaming state after realizing the second type gaming state;
Display means capable of displaying a display effect for each lottery;
An effect determining means for determining a display effect to be realized using the display means corresponding to each lottery,
Effect control means for realizing the display effect determined by the effect determination means using the display means;
With
The production determining means
M realized corresponding to M lotteries from the first to Mth (M is an integer less than or equal to 2 and less than N) of the lotteries that can be performed over the N times in the second type gaming state. A first type of display effect configured to explain the target for suggesting a specific hit by realizing a display effect in which the goal is achieved as the display effect of times, through the M display effects. The display effect can be determined,
As the display effects realized corresponding to the M + 1th and subsequent lotteries, a second type display effect including a display effect for deriving whether or not the target is achieved can be determined.
Gaming machine.

  The first type display effect is realized corresponding to the first M (M <N) lottery out of N lotteries that can be performed in the second type gaming state. Thus, the first type display effect is realized in a state where there is a margin in the remaining number of lotteries in the second type gaming state. Accordingly, the player can observe the first type display effect in a state where the feeling of frustration is small, such as “the second type gaming state ends without winning a win”. Here, the first type display effect is configured to explain a target for suggesting a specific hit through M display effects. Although such an explanation is performed through M display effects, since the feeling of frustration is small as described above, the player should calm down and observe the M display effects (first type display effect). Can do. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the target.

  Further, in the M + 1 and subsequent lotteries, a second type display effect for deriving whether or not the goal is achieved can be realized. Since the second type display effect is realized in a state where the number of remaining lotteries in the second type game state is small, the feeling of frustration of the player is increased compared to the state where the first type display effect is realized. However, since the player has already properly grasped the target as described above, the player can observe the second type display effect for deriving whether or not the target is achieved without being impatient or confused. The game can be advanced while expecting the winning lottery result.

  As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the start ports 2101 and 2102 are examples of passing means, and the main control MPU 4100a that acquires random numbers used for special lottery as lottery information is an example of lottery information acquiring means, and lottery information is The main control MPU 4100a that performs a special lottery to determine whether or not it is a win is an example of a lottery means, and one of a normal external disadvantageous state, a normal external advantageous state, a certain variation external disadvantageous state, and a certain variation external advantageous state. The main control MPU 4100a that is realized by selecting the gaming state is an example of the gaming state realization means, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of the display means. The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 that determine the production are the whole. This is an example of the effect determining means, and the main control board 4100 that realizes the display effect using the display means is an example of the effect control means.

[Aspect 2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The effect determining means determines each of the M display effects so that the M display effects share part of the effect explaining the target,
The effect control means realizes the effect that explains the target as a whole in the M series of display effects by realizing the display effect determined by the effect determining means as the M display effects. Let
Gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, the M times of the display effects share the effects for explaining the target part by part, so that the M series of display effects as a whole realizes the effects for explaining the target. It is possible to realize an effect that explains the target while increasing the degree of freedom of the time of the effect. For example, if the time of the display effect realized corresponding to one lottery is shortened, it is possible to realize the effect of explaining the target while suppressing the time spent on the person. In addition, if the time of the display effect realized corresponding to one lottery is lengthened, the effect of explaining the target can be realized along a long scenario that cannot be realized by the display effect of one lottery. .

  Further, such an effect for explaining the goal is realized in correspondence with the first M (M <N) lottery out of N lotteries that can be performed in the second type gaming state. Therefore, the player can observe M display effects in a state where the feeling of frustration is small.

  As described above, the player can enjoy the effect realized over the M display effects calmly, and appropriately by observing such an effect (effect explaining the goal) appropriately. The target can be grasped.

[Aspect 3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
The production control means includes
It is possible to notify the result of the lottery by the decorative symbol displayed in a stopped manner by performing the variation display of the decorative symbol and the stop display,
When realizing the first type display effect, compared to the case of realizing the second type display effect, using the remaining part of the display means while displaying the fluctuating decorative pattern smaller By further displaying an image for explaining the target, the display effect can be advanced,
When realizing the second type display effect, the variation design of the decorative symbol and the stop display are displayed by displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol larger than in the case of realizing the first type display effect. The display effect used can be advanced,
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the first type display effect, the decorative pattern that fluctuates is displayed smaller than in the second type display effect, and an image for explaining the target is further displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the display effect using the image from being disturbed by the decorative design. In addition, since the first type display effect is realized in a state where there is a margin in the remaining number of lotteries in the second type gaming state, even if the result of the lottery is lost, the player has a margin, The first type display effect can be observed. A player who can observe the production with a margin can fully enjoy the production using the image for explaining the goal without being disturbed by the decorative design.

  On the other hand, the second type display effect is realized in a state where the number of remaining lotteries in the second type game state is smaller than that of the first type display effect. Therefore, when the second type display effect is realized, the player strongly feels an expectation (interest for the lottery result) that he wants to win the winning as soon as possible. Here, in the second type display effect, if the decorative symbol is displayed small like the first type display effect, the player feels stress because it is difficult to see the decorative symbol that can notify the lottery result. there is a possibility. However, in the above-described configuration, in the second type display effect, the display effect using the decorative symbol change display and the stop display progresses by displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol larger than the first type display effect. Can do. That is, in the second type display effect, a decorative symbol capable of notifying a lottery result that is highly interested by the player is displayed large. As a result, the player's stress is alleviated, so that the player can advance the game while enjoying the display effect.

[Aspect 4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The effect determining means, as the display effect realized corresponding to the M + 1 and subsequent lottery,
When the result of the lottery is the specific hit, it is possible to determine a display effect in which the goal is achieved,
When the result of the lottery is not the specific hit, it is possible to determine a display effect that ends without achieving the target.
Gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, when the lottery result is a specific hit, a display effect in which the target described in the first type display effect can be achieved, and the lottery result is not a specific hit. In this case, a display effect that ends without achieving the goal can be realized. In this way, an easy-to-understand display effect that strongly links the target and the specific hit is realized, so that the player can proceed with the game while enjoying the display effect without being bothered by understanding the display effect. .

[Aspect 5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, further comprising:
A movable member capable of guiding the game medium to the passage means;
The movable member is
A first operation mode in which the game medium is relatively difficult to guide to the passage means;
A second operation mode in which the game medium is relatively easy to guide to the passage means;
It is possible to operate in an operation mode selected from a plurality of operation modes including
The first type gaming state is a gaming state in which at least the movable member operates in the first operation mode,
The second type gaming state is a gaming state in which at least the movable member operates in the second operation mode.
Gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, the first type display effect is realized in the second type game state in which the movable member operates in the second operation mode that is relatively easy to guide the game medium to the passage means. The possibility of having a gap in the middle can be reduced.

  In addition, the movable piece 2105 in the said embodiment is an example of the movable member which can guide a game medium to the specific passage means (lower start port 2102) of one or more passage means. The operation mode of the movable piece 2105 in the state where the time reduction function is not activated is an example of the first operation mode, and the operation mode of the reception movable piece 2105 in which the time reduction function is activated is the second operation mode. It is an example.

  As mentioned above, although the aspect extracted from the viewpoint of "the number of changes after winning a game" was demonstrated, from this viewpoint, not only these aspects but various other aspects can be extracted. Moreover, you may combine the structure of a part of above-mentioned various aspect or aspect with the other aspect demonstrated in this specification. Moreover, you may apply the structure of a part of the extracted aspect or aspect to another various aspect and effect example (or the aspect extracted from a viewpoint of implement | achieving various effect examples).

[Technical ideas extracted by focusing on the flow of performance patterns]
The following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted by looking at the present embodiment focusing on the “flow of effect pattern”.

[Aspect 6]
A gaming machine,
Passing means configured to allow game media to pass through;
Lottery information acquisition means capable of acquiring information used for the lottery in response to the game medium passing through the passage means;
Using the lottery information, a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win,
Display means capable of displaying a display effect for each lottery;
An effect determining means for determining a display effect to be realized using the display means corresponding to each lottery,
Effect control means for realizing the display effect determined by the effect determination means using the display means;
With
The types of winning of the lottery by the lottery means are per 1st type, per 2nd type with different benefits for the player per 1st type, per 1st type and per 2nd type. And a third type that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of
The effect determining means, as the display effect pattern,
The first specific derivation effect for deriving whether the first specific effect is performed is a pattern for the case where the first type is won and the case where the lottery is lost. A first type effect pattern that realizes the first specific effect after one specific derivation effect and realizes an effect suggesting whether or not the first type is won after the first specific effect;
This is a pattern for the case where the lottery is lost, and, like the first type effect pattern, realizes the first specific derivation effect, but unlike the first type effect pattern, the first specific derivation After the effect, the second specific derivation effect for deriving whether or not the second specific effect is performed is realized without realizing the first specific effect, and the second specific derivation effect is realized after the second specific derivation effect. A second type effect pattern that realizes an effect suggesting that the lottery is lost by ending the effect without realizing the effect;
It is a pattern for the case of winning for each of the second type or the third type, and realizes the first specific derivation effect in the same manner as the first type effect pattern and the second type effect pattern, Although the first type effect pattern is different from the first type effect pattern, the second specific derivation effect is realized without realizing the first specific effect after the first specific derivation effect. Unlike the second type effect pattern, by realizing the second specific effect after the second specific derivation effect, an effect suggesting that the second type or the third type is won. Type 3 production pattern to be realized,
Can be determined according to the result of the lottery,
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific derivation effect is realized but the first specific effect is not realized, the most advantageous possibility of the first type disappears among the three types. However, there is still a possibility that the second specific derivation effect will be realized. Then, after the second specific derivation effect is realized, if the second specific effect is further realized, there is a possibility of per second type or per third type. Therefore, even if the first specific effect is not realized, the player can enjoy the subsequent effects while feeling the expectation of the possibility of realizing the second specific effect. Furthermore, when the second specific performance is realized, there is a possibility of both per second type and per third type having different advantages. Therefore, when the second specific effect is realized without realizing the first specific effect, the player is willing to determine whether the player has won the second type or the third type. You can proceed with the game. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the start ports 2101 and 2102 are examples of passing means, and the main control MPU 4100a that acquires random numbers used for special lottery as lottery information is an example of lottery information acquiring means, and lottery information is The main control MPU 4100a that performs a special lottery to determine whether or not it is a win is an example of a lottery means, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of a display means, and a main control board 4100 and a peripheral control board 4140 that determine an effect. Is the example of the effect determining means, and the main control board 4100 that realizes the display effect using the display means is an example of the effect control means.

[Aspect 7]
A gaming machine according to aspect 6,
The effect determining means, as the display effect pattern,
This is a pattern for the case where the lottery is lost and, like the second type effect pattern and the third type effect pattern, realizes the first specific derivation effect, but after the first specific derivation effect Unlike the second pattern and the third type effect pattern, the first specific effect is not realized, and the second specific derivation effect is not realized and the effect is ended, so that the lottery is lost. A fourth type effect pattern that realizes an effect suggesting that it has been made can be determined according to the result of the lottery,
Gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, when the first specific derivation effect is realized but the first specific derivation effect is not realized, there is a possibility that the second specific derivation effect is not realized and the effect ends. Therefore, when the first specific effect is not realized, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the second specific derivation effect is desired, and when the second specific derivation effect is realized, It is possible to provide the player with the joy of being able to realize the second specific derivation effect! Thus, since the enjoyment obtained by observing the performance is improved, the player can progress the game more happily.

[Aspect 8]
The gaming machine according to aspect 6 or 7, further comprising:
From a plurality of types of gaming states including a first type gaming state in which the winning probability in the lottery is a predetermined low probability and a second type gaming state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability A game state realization means that can be realized by selecting one game state;
A granting means capable of realizing a plurality of types of the game including a first game that can grant a game medium to a player and a second game that has less game media that can be given compared to the first game. ,
With
The first type is a place where the first game is realized by the granting means,
Unlike the first type, the second type game is realized by the giving means, and the game state is realized by the game state realization means after the end of the second type game. It is a hit to be switched from the first type gaming state to the second type gaming state,
Although the second game is the same as that for the second type, the third type is different from the second type, and the game state is realized by the game state realizing means after the second game is completed. The state is about to be maintained in the first type gaming state,
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the first type is won, the player can enjoy the first game in which a relatively large number of game media can be obtained. On the other hand, if the player wins the second type, the player can obtain a high winning probability (high probability) although the player cannot enjoy the first winning game. As described above, although the benefits for the player are different between the first type and the second type, both can bring a great benefit (for example, a large amount of game media) to the player. Therefore, when the first specific effect is not realized, many game media cannot be obtained by the first game, but a high winning probability (high probability) can be obtained by realizing the second specific effect. If it can be done (if it is won by the second type), the player can finally obtain a large profit. Accordingly, the player first enjoys the effect in the hope that the first specific effect will be realized, and even if the first specific effect is not realized, the second specific effect is then performed. Expect to be realized and enjoy the production.

  As described above, the aspect extracted from the viewpoint of “flow of effect pattern” has been described. However, from this viewpoint, it is possible to extract not only these aspects but also various other aspects. Moreover, you may combine the structure of a part of above-mentioned various aspect or aspect with the other aspect demonstrated in this specification. Moreover, you may apply the structure of a part of the extracted aspect or aspect to another various aspect and effect example (or the aspect extracted from a viewpoint of implement | achieving various effect examples).

  Further, from the present embodiment, the following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted.

Aspect 9: In a gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A decorative member disposed at a predetermined position in the game area in a front view and having a predetermined decoration on at least the front surface;
A pair of sliders each having a rack gear attached to each of the rear left and right ends of the decorative member and extending in the vertical direction;
A unit base for supporting the pair of sliders so as to be slidable in the vertical direction,
A pinion gear that is rotatably supported at a predetermined position of the unit base and meshes with the rack gear in one of the sliders;
A drive motor attached to the unit base by rotating and driving the pinion gear in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game medium being driven into the game area;
A driven gear that meshes with the rack gear of the other slider on the opposite side of the slider having the rack gear meshed with the pinion gear driven to rotate by the drive motor and is rotatably supported by the unit base. It has a gear ”.

  Here, examples of the “decorative member” include “what imitates a predetermined item according to the concept of the gaming machine”, “what imitates a predetermined character according to the concept of the gaming machine”, and the like. In addition, the decorative member may be provided with light emitting means that can emit light according to the gaming state.

  In addition, “according to the gaming state” means “accepting entrances arranged in the gaming area (for example, a general winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a big winning opening, an accessory winning opening, a V winning opening, "According to the acceptance of the game medium to" etc. "," In response to the game medium that has been put into (entered in) the game area has passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.) ”,“ According to the lottery result drawn by accepting game media ”,“ According to the rotation of multiple rotating bodies triggered by the insertion of game media ”,“ Rotated by the input of game media A game medium to be put into the game area, in accordance with the combination of symbols displayed on the stopped rotator in order to stop a plurality of rotators in succession, according to the type of effect determined by a lottery such as a start winning prize, etc. "According to the amount of driving of" Depending on the length of hammering the blank of game media to be written ", and the like.

  By the way, since the thing of patent document 1 is equipped with the drive motor in each slide mechanism which slides the both ends of a decoration member as mentioned above, the slide mechanism whole is equipped with a drive motor with comparatively big projection amount on both sides. There is a problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the movable decorative member is limited due to the installation space. On the other hand, it is possible to reduce the size of the entire slide mechanism by disposing the drive motor only on one of the slide mechanisms on both sides and transmitting the drive force from the drive motor to the other slide mechanism. It is done. However, in this case, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor from one slide mechanism to the other slide mechanism is newly required, and the number of components related to the entire slide mechanism increases, resulting in an increase in cost. is there.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 9, the game area into which the game medium is driven by the player's operation on the gaming machine, and the decoration member that is disposed at a predetermined position in the game area in a front view and has a predetermined decoration at least on the front surface A pair of sliders respectively attached to the left and right ends of the decorative member and having rack gears extending in the vertical direction; a unit base for supporting the pair of sliders slidably in the vertical direction; and a predetermined position on the unit base. A pinion gear that is rotatably supported and meshes with a rack gear in one slider, and a drive motor that is attached to the unit base by rotating the pinion gear according to a gaming state that changes as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area. , The one on the opposite side of the slider having the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear driven to rotate by the drive motor And a rack gear meshed with the square of the slider is obtained by so comprises a driven gear rotatably supported on the unit base, a.

  Accordingly, the sliders attached to the left and right ends of the decorative member are supported by the unit base so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear of one slider is driven to rotate by the drive motor. And a driven gear that meshes with the rack gear of the other slider, so that when the drive motor is driven to rotate according to the gaming state that changes as the gaming medium is driven into the gaming area, the pinion The decorative member slides up and down by one slider via the gear and the rack gear. At the same time, the other slider slides up and down as the decorative member slides, and the driven gear meshed with the rack gear of the other slider idles. Therefore, the decorative member can be slid up and down without any problem. In both cases, since the drive motor is provided only on one of the left and right sides, the mechanism for sliding the decorative member can be made smaller than before, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the movable (sliding) decorative member can be increased. it can. Therefore, a decorative member that slides even in a narrow space can be provided, and a gaming machine that can entertain a player with the sliding decorative member and suppress a decrease in interest can be provided.

  In addition, the idler driven gear is meshed with the rack gear of the other slider, and resistance can be applied to the other slider, so that when the decorative member is raised, the other slider It is possible to suppress the descent, and it is possible to easily maintain the decorative member at the raised position, and when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the resistance applied to the other slider by the driven gear causes the decorative member to move downward. It can suppress that the other side falls and the decoration member inclines, can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the decoration member, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, only the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear of one slider is rotated by the drive motor with respect to the rack gears of the sliders at both left and right ends, and the drive motor is arranged only on one side of the left and right sides. Therefore, the space on at least the other side related to the slide of the decorative member can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the decorative member is relatively enlarged or another large decorative member is arranged on the other side. The game machine can be made conspicuous by the decorative member and attract the player's attention.

  The rack gear is preferably formed such that its gear teeth protrude from the left or right side of the slider in the left-right direction, so that the pinion gear and the driven gear that mesh with the rack gear can be moved laterally with respect to the slider. Since they are arranged side by side, the depth in the front-rear direction relating to the slider, the pinion gear, and the driven gear can be made as thin as possible, and the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative member can be made relatively thick. Therefore, since the depth of the depth can be increased, the three-dimensional effect of the decorative member can be further enhanced, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decorative member having excellent decorativeness, and the entertainment is reduced by delighting the player. Can be suppressed. Further, since the depth and thickness can increase the strength and rigidity of the decorative member, for example, even if the decorative member is formed into a frame shape (frame shape) or enlarged, the decorative member may be bent or distorted. It is possible to provide a decorative member with a higher decorative effect by avoiding giving a cheap impression to the player due to deformation of the decorative member. It can be a gaming machine that attracts the attention of the person.

  Further, the other slider having the rack gear meshing with the driven gear may be provided with assist means for assisting the rotation of the driven gear so that the slider can easily slide in the ascending direction. However, since it is easy to rotate in the direction in which one slider is raised, the decorative member can be raised smoothly and the other slider can be made difficult to lower when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position. A gaming machine that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the unit base may be provided with guide means for restricting the slider from moving away from the pinion gear and the driven gear, thereby restricting the slider from moving away from the pinion gear and the driven gear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent loosening of the rack gear, the pinion gear and the driven gear of the slider, and to slide the decorative member securely by meshing the rack gear, the pinion gear and the driven gear in a good state. In addition, the slider can be guided straight up and down by the guiding means, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being lowered by sliding the decorative member without a sense of incongruity. In addition, it is desirable that the slider is in contact with and slides as the above-mentioned guide means, so that when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the sliding resistance caused by the contact with the guide means causes the It is possible to make it difficult to lower the slider (the other slider) on the driven gear side where the driving force is not applied, and it is possible to prevent the decoration member from tilting and making the player feel uncomfortable and lowering interest.

  Further, the decorative member may be formed in a substantially U-shaped frame shape with a pair of vertical portions and a horizontal portion connecting the tips of the vertical portions, whereby the decorative member can be made to the size of the outer shape. On the other hand, since the weight can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor can be reduced when the decoration member is raised, and the drive motor is consumed at an early stage, causing a problem that the decoration member does not slide. When the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the other slider can be made difficult to lower, and the decorative member tilts and looks bad and lowers the interest of the player. Can be prevented. In addition, when the decorative member is formed in a substantially U shape (frame shape), the outer shape can be enlarged while suppressing an increase in weight, and the mechanism for sliding the decorative member becomes relatively small, and the decorative member can be arranged freely. In addition to increasing the degree, the large decorative member slides up and down to attract the player's interest, and the fun of the decorative member, the decoration, etc. are enjoyed and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, after providing an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image behind the decorative member, the decorative member is placed between the position on the front side and the position on the front side of the effect display means. In this manner, the decorative member is slid to the front side of the effect display means so that the decorative member blocks the effect image and makes the decorative member stand out from the player. Can be strongly attracted to the decorative member, and it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by delighting the movement (slide) and decoration of the decorative member, and display the effect image related to the decorative member on the effect display means By doing so, it is possible to present to the player an effect in which the decorative member and the effect image are integrated, and it is possible to suppress the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  In addition, the rear end of the game area is partitioned, and a plate-like game panel having an opening that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the approximate center, and the game medium attached to the lower side of the opening of the game panel can be received. A receiving unit having at least one receiving port, a decorative member and a unit base are disposed on the rear side of the receiving unit, and the decorative member can be slid into the opening of the game panel in a front view. As a result, when the decorative member is raised according to the gaming state, the decorative member can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening of the game panel, and thus the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative member. At the same time, the entrance unit will be in the player ’s field of view, allowing the player to think that something good will happen at the entrance unit, Can let me increase the expectation for skills is interest be suppressed. In this case, it is desirable that the pair of sliders be positioned immediately after the receiving unit and that the drive motor and the pinion gear be positioned on the outer side than between the sliders. Even if the rear end protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the gaming panel, it is possible to prevent the reception unit and the drive motor from interfering with each other, and it slides up and down in a narrow space on the rear side of the reception unit. Since the decorative member can be securely arranged and the drive motor can be moved away from the receiving unit as much as possible, the sensor provided in the receiving unit or the connection to the receiving port by the magnetic force from the drive motor. It is possible to avoid the malfunction of sensors for detecting fraud, and the game is interrupted by malfunction. Technique's can be prevented from being lowered the interest and player's interest to delight game without problems can be suppressed.

Aspect 10: In the configuration of aspect 9,
“It is provided at a position opposite to the pinion gear and the driven gear across the pair of sliders in the unit base, and restricts the slider from moving in a direction away from the pinion gear and the driven gear. In addition, it further comprises a guiding means capable of guiding the slider in the vertical direction.

  Here, “guide means” are “projections that are slidable with respect to the slider”, “walls that are slidable with respect to the slider”, and “rollers with respect to the slider”. The roller-like thing made movable "etc. are mentioned. When the guide means is a projection (guide protrusion), the guide protrusion is defined as “an axis line passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear in a direction perpendicular to the slider sliding direction (vertical direction). It is desirable to provide at least one each on both sides of the bearing ”or“ provide on the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (vertical direction) of the slider ”. .

  According to the configuration of aspect 10, the gaming machine is provided with a pair of sliders in the unit base on positions opposite to the pinion gear and the driven gear, and the slider moves in a direction away from the pinion gear and the driven gear. And a guide means that can guide the slider in the vertical direction.

  As a result, the unit base is provided with guide means for restricting the slider from moving away from the pinion gear and the driven gear, so that the slider moves away from the pinion gear and the driven gear so that the rack gear can be meshed. The loosening can be prevented, the decorative member can be slid reliably by meshing the rack gear, the pinion gear and the driven gear in good condition, and the slider is guided straight up and down by the guide means. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by sliding the decorative member without a sense of incongruity.

Aspect 11: In the configuration of aspect 10,
"The guide means is
At least one is provided on both sides of the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear in a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the slider slides, and is slidable with respect to the slider. It is characterized by the fact that it is a “guide protrusion”.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 11, at least one guide means is provided on both sides of the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear in a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the slider slides, Thus, the guide protrusion is made slidable.

  As a result, the guide means described above are guide protrusions provided on both sides across the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear in a direction perpendicular to the slide direction (vertical direction) of the slider. In addition to being able to reliably realize a gaming machine that exhibits operational effects, the slider is slid with respect to the guide protrusion as the guide means, so that when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the slide The slider on the driven gear side (the other slider) where the driving force from the drive motor is not applied by the dynamic resistance can be made difficult to lower, and the decorative member tilts can give the player a sense of incongruity and lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the guide protrusions as the guide means are arranged on both sides of the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear, respectively, compared with the case where it is arranged on the axis passing through the rotation axis, The slider can be made difficult to rotate, and the decorative member can be slid in a good state by preventing the decorative member from sliding unsteadily.

Aspect 12: In any one configuration from Aspect 9 to Aspect 11,
"The decorative member is
A pair of bar-like vertical portions that extend in the vertical direction in which the slider slides and are spaced apart in the left-right direction, and to which the slider is attached on the rear side;
And a bar-shaped horizontal portion that connects the leading ends of the vertical portions, and is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front.

  According to the configuration of aspect 12, the decorative member extends in the vertical direction in which the slider slides and is spaced apart in the horizontal direction, and the pair of rod-like vertical portions to which the slider is attached on the rear side and the tips of the vertical portions are connected to each other. It is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front, with a bar-shaped lateral portion to be connected.

  As a result, the decorative member is formed in a substantially U-shaped frame shape with a pair of vertical portions and a horizontal portion connecting the tips of the vertical portions, and the weight can be reduced with respect to the size of the outer shape. The load applied to the drive motor when raising the decorative member can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the drive motor is consumed at an early stage and the decorative member does not slide, and the decorative member When the player is stopped at the raised position, the other slider can be made difficult to lower, and it can be prevented that the decorative member is inclined and the appearance is deteriorated and the player's interest is lowered.

  In addition, since the decorative member is formed in a substantially U-shape (frame shape), the outer shape can be enlarged while suppressing an increase in weight, and the mechanism for sliding the decorative member becomes relatively small, and the decorative member In addition to increasing the degree of freedom of placement, the large decorative member slides in the vertical direction, which can attract the player's attention strongly, and the fun and fun of the decorative member can be enjoyed to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  An effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image behind the decoration member may be arranged, and the decoration member may be slidable to the front side of the effect display means. Frame-like decoration for the player by sliding a specific decoration image in a region corresponding to the decoration member on the display screen of the effect display means. It is possible to make the member feel as if it is a display device different from the effect display means, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by the collaboration effect by the decoration member and the effect image, and entertain the player. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

Aspect 13: In any one configuration from Aspect 9 to Aspect 12,
“It further includes an effect display means arranged at a position visible from the player side in the game area in front view, behind the decorative member and the unit base, and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image,
The unit base is arranged at a position on the outer side of the front view than the effect display means, and the decorative member is slidable to the front side of the effect display means.

  Here, as “effect display means”, “liquid crystal display device (LCD)”, “CRT display device (CRT)”, “plasma display”, “laser display”, “LED display device”, “organic EL display device” And the like. In addition, it is desirable to use a thing with a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, so that the space for arranging the decoration member and the like can be made as wide as possible. A member can be provided, and a gaming machine with high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  According to the structure of aspect 13, the effect display which is arrange | positioned in the position which can be visually recognized from the player side in a front view game area in a game machine in the back side rather than a decoration member and a unit base. In addition to providing the means, the unit base is arranged at a position outside the front view from the effect display means, and the decorative member can be slid to the front side of the effect display means.

  As a result, the decoration member can be slid in the vertical direction between the position outside the effect display means and the position on the front side according to the gaming state, so the decoration member is slid to the front side of the effect display means. By making it possible to make the decorative member stand out from the player and to attract the player's interest strongly to the decorative member, it is possible to enjoy the movement (slide) and decoration of the decorative member, and to suppress the interest from deteriorating Can do.

  In addition, since the decoration member can be slid to the front side of the effect display means, the decoration member is slid to the front side of the effect display means, and the effect image associated with the decoration member is displayed on the effect display means. It is possible to present to the player an effect in which the member and the effect image are integrated, and it is possible to suppress the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  When the decorative member is formed in a frame shape and the decorative member is slid to the front side of the effect display means, a specific effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the decoration member on the display screen of the effect display means. As a result, the frame-shaped decorative member can be given an illusion to the player as if it were a display device different from the effect display means. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Aspect 14: In any one configuration from Aspect 9 to Aspect 13,
A plate-like gaming panel having an opening that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the gaming area when viewed from the front;
At least one which is attached to the front side of the game panel and below the opening and is capable of receiving a game medium driven into the game area and is capable of giving a predetermined privilege by receiving the game medium. A receiving unit having two receiving ports,
The decorative member and the unit base are
The pair of sliders is positioned immediately after the receiving unit, and the decorative member is disposed on the rear side of the game panel so as to slide into the opening in a front view. The pinion gear and the drive motor are attached to a position outside the space between the sliders ”.

  Here, as the “game panel”, an opaque one such as “plywood (for example, veneer board)”, “glued wood”, “metal plate”, or “acrylic resin plate”, “polycarbonate resin plate”, Examples thereof include transparent materials such as “ABS resin plate”, “polypropylene plate”, “polyarylate resin plate”, “methacrylic resin plate”, and “glass plate”.

  In addition, as “reception entrance”, “general winning entrance”, “starting entrance”, “variable starting entrance”, “variable winning entrance”, “large winning entrance”, “actual prize winning entrance”, “V winning entrance” Examples of the “accepting unit” include an “attacker unit”, a “general winning entry unit”, and an “accompaniment winning unit”.

  Furthermore, the predetermined “privileges” include “payout of game media”, “change of winning probability of variable start opening”, “lottery of lottery results in which an advantageous gaming state is advantageous to the player”, “advantageous game” "Change in the lottery probability that the lottery result in which the state occurs is drawn (for example, probability fluctuation)", "Lottery time in the lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs, or until the lottery result is suggested Change of time (for example, reduction of time) ", and the like.

  By the way, when it is made to provide the entrance unit which has the entrance which gives a predetermined privilege by reception of a game medium in the front of a game panel, in the entrance unit, the game medium received in the entrance is made into a game panel. Since it is discharged to the outside of the gaming area (gaming machine) without returning to the player on the rear side, the rear end of the receiving unit protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the gaming panel. There is a problem that an empty space on the rear side of the entrance unit becomes narrower than other parts.

  According to the configuration of aspect 14, the gaming machine has a plate-like gaming panel that has an opening that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the front-view gaming area, and partitions the rear end of the gaming area. A reception device which is attached to the lower side of the opening on the front surface and which can receive a game medium driven into the game area and has at least one reception port which can be given a predetermined privilege by receiving the game medium. The decorative unit and the unit base are positioned between the pair of sliders immediately after the receiving unit, and the decorative member slides into the opening in front view. In addition, the pinion gear and the drive motor are attached to the outer side of the space between the pair of sliders.

  With this, after attaching the receiving unit having the receiving port on the lower side of the opening on the front surface of the game panel, the pair of sliders is located immediately after the receiving unit and more than between the sliders. The decorative member and the unit base are arranged so that the drive motor and the pinion gear are located outside, and the decorative member slides into the opening in the front view, so that the rear end of the receiving unit is rearward from the rear surface of the game panel. Even if it projects to the side, it is possible to prevent the receiving unit and the drive motor from interfering with each other, and the decorative member that slides in the vertical direction is securely disposed in the narrow space on the rear side of the receiving unit. Similar effects can be obtained.

  In addition, a drive motor and the like are disposed outside the space between the pair of sliders, and the drive motor can be moved away from the receiving unit as much as possible. It is possible to avoid the malfunction of the received sensor, the sensor for detecting fraudulent acts at the entrance, etc., and the malfunction will interrupt the game and reduce the interest of the player Can be prevented, and it is possible to entertain the game without any problem and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the unit base that slidably supports the decorative member is arranged immediately after the receiving unit, the decorative member can be raised into the opening of the game panel in a front view. When raised, the decorative member can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening of the game panel, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative member, and at the same time, the receiving unit enters the player's view As a result, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen at the entrance unit, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, you may make it equip the decoration member and the unit base with the production | presentation display means visually recognizable from the player side through the opening part of a front view game panel, and, thereby, a decoration member can be equipped with a game panel by front view. When it is raised into the opening, the decorative member is positioned on the front side of the effect display means. Therefore, the decorative member blocks the effect image and makes the decorative member stand out from the player, so that the player's interest is strengthened to the decorative member. It can be attracted, and it is possible to entertain the movement (slide) and decoration of the decorative member, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, a frame-shaped center accessory having a peripheral wall portion inserted from the front side into the opening portion of the game panel and protruding forward from the game panel may be provided. Can be prevented from entering the opening, and can be a gaming machine having a gaming area with an atmosphere similar to that of a conventional gaming machine with a center accessory. It is possible to prevent the player accustomed to the game machine from being distracted by giving a sense of incongruity, and to easily select the game machine as a game machine to be played.

Aspect 15: In any one configuration from Aspect 9 to Aspect 14,
“It further includes assist means for assisting rotation of the driven gear so that the other slider having the rack gear meshing with the driven gear can easily slide in the ascending direction”. To do.

  Here, as the “assist means”, “the one in which the urging force is applied to the driven gear by a spring, rubber or the like so that the driven gear rotates in the direction in which the other slider moves up”, “the direction in which the other slider moves up” And the like, in which a rotational moment is applied to the driven gear by a weight and a flexible wire so that the driven gear rotates. The urging force or rotational moment may be applied directly to the driven gear, or indirectly to the driven gear (for example, via the driven gear or a transmission gear that rotates integrally with the driven gear). An urging force or a rotational moment may be applied to a device that operates via a rotating shaft that rotates integrally with the driven gear.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 15, the gaming machine is provided with assist means for assisting the rotation of the driven gear so that the other slider having the rack gear meshing with the driven gear can easily slide in the ascending direction. It is.

  As a result, the assisting gear makes it easy for the driven gear to rotate in the direction in which one slider is raised, so that the decorative member can be raised smoothly, and when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the other gear is raised. The slider can be made difficult to lower, and a gaming machine that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

Aspect 16: In a gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A plate-like game panel having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area in front view, and defining a rear end of the game area;
At least one which is attached to the front side of the game panel and below the opening and is capable of receiving a game medium driven into the game area and is capable of giving a predetermined privilege by receiving the game medium. A receiving unit having two receiving ports;
Effect display means arranged to be visible from the player side through the opening on the rear side of the receiving unit and the game panel, and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
A pair of bar-shaped vertical portions that are arranged between the effect display means and the game panel, extend in the vertical direction and are spaced apart in the horizontal direction, and bar-shaped horizontal portions that connect the upper ends of the vertical portions. A decorative member that is formed in a substantially U shape in front view and at least a predetermined decoration is provided on the front surface;
A pair of sliders each having a rack gear attached to the rear side of the vertical portion of the decorative member and extending in the vertical direction;
A pair of sliders are supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, so that the decorative member can be slid to the front side of the effect display means, and the pair of sliders is positioned immediately after the receiving unit. A unit base disposed at a position on the rear side of the front side of the game display panel with respect to the effect display means;
A pinion gear that is rotatably supported at a position outside the pair of sliders in the unit base and meshes with the rack gear in one of the sliders;
A drive motor that is rotationally driven in accordance with a game state that is changed when a game medium is driven into the game area, and is attached to a position outside the pair of sliders in the unit base;
A driven gear that meshes with the rack gear of the other slider on the opposite side of the slider having the rack gear meshed with the pinion gear driven to rotate by the drive motor and is rotatably supported by the unit base. With gear,
The driven gear and the pinion gear are opposite to each other on the unit base with the pair of sliders interposed therebetween, and the rotation shafts of the driven gear and the pinion gear are perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the slider slides. At least one guide projection provided on both sides of the axis passing through the core and slidable with respect to the slider, the slider moves in a direction away from the driven gear and the pinion gear. And a guide means capable of guiding the slider in the vertical direction.

According to the configuration of the aspect 16, the gaming machine has a gaming area into which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, and an opening that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the gaming area in a front view. A plate-like game panel that divides the rear end of the game panel, and a front side of the game panel that is attached to the lower side of the opening to allow the game medium that has been driven into the game area to be received and to be received by receiving the game medium. And a receiving unit having at least one receiving port that can be given a bonus, and a rearward side of the receiving unit and the game panel, and arranged to be visible from the player side through the opening, displaying a predetermined effect image A possible display means, a pair of bar-like vertical parts arranged between the effect display means and the game panel, extending in the vertical direction and spaced apart in the horizontal direction, and the upper ends of the vertical parts are connected to each other. Horizontal bar A decorative member having a substantially U-shaped front view and a predetermined decoration on at least the front surface, and a rack gear attached to the rear side of the vertical portion of the decorative member and extending vertically. The pair of sliders and the pair of sliders are supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the decorative member can be slid to the front side of the effect display means so that the pair of sliders is positioned immediately after the receiving unit. The unit base disposed at the rear side of the game panel on the rear side of the front of the effect display means and rotatably supported at a position outside the pair of sliders on the unit base. A pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven according to the gaming state that changes as a game medium is driven into the gaming area. A rack motor in the other slider opposite to one slider having a drive motor attached to a position outside the pair of sliders in the unit base and a rack gear meshing with a pinion gear driven to rotate by the drive motor The driven gear, which is rotatably supported by the unit base, and the driven gear and the pinion gear are at opposite positions on the unit base across the pair of sliders, and are perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the slider slides. At least one guide projection provided on both sides of the axis passing through the rotation axis of each of the driven gear and the pinion gear in the direction, which is slidable with respect to the slider, the slider from the driven gear and the pinion gear It is possible to guide the slider in the vertical direction while restricting the movement in the direction of moving away. And a guiding means.

  As a result, when the drive motor is driven to rotate in accordance with the game state that changes as the game medium is driven into the game area, the decorative member slides up and down by one slider via the pinion gear and the rack gear. As the decorative member slides, the other slider also slides in the vertical direction, and the driven gear meshed with the rack gear of the other slider is idled so that the decorative member can be slid in the vertical direction without any problem. At this time, since the drive motor and the pinion gear are located outside the space between the sliders, even if the rear end of the reception unit protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel, the drive unit and the drive unit are driven. It is possible to prevent the motor and the motor from interfering with each other, and the decorative member that slides in the vertical direction can be securely arranged in the narrow space on the rear side of the receiving unit, and the drive motor is provided only on one of the left and right sides. Since the mechanism relating to the sliding of the decorative member can be made smaller than before, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the movable (sliding) decorative member can be increased. Therefore, a decorative member that slides even in a narrow space can be provided, and a gaming machine that can entertain a player with the sliding decorative member and suppress a decrease in interest can be provided.

  In addition, only the pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear of one slider is rotationally driven by the drive motor with respect to the rack gear of the slider at the left and right ends, and the drive motor is arranged only on one side of the left and right sides. Therefore, the space on at least the other side related to the slide of the decorative member can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the decorative member is relatively enlarged or another large decorative member is arranged on the other side. The game machine can be made conspicuous by the decorative member and attract the player's attention.

  In addition, the idler driven gear is meshed with the rack gear of the other slider, and resistance can be applied to the other slider, so that when the decorative member is raised, the other slider It is possible to suppress the descent, and it is possible to easily maintain the decorative member at the raised position, and when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position, the resistance applied to the other slider by the driven gear causes the decorative member to move downward. It can suppress that the other side falls and the decoration member inclines, can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the decoration member, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as a guide means for restricting the slider from moving in the direction away from the pinion gear and the driven gear to the unit base, the rotation axis of the pinion gear and the driven gear is perpendicular to the slider sliding direction (vertical direction). Since the guide projections provided on both sides of the axis passing through the shaft are provided, it is possible to prevent loosening of the rack gear, the pinion gear and the driven gear of the slider, and the rack gear, the pinion gear and the driven gear can be prevented. Can be reliably slid and the slider can be guided straight up and down by the guide means, and the decoration member can be slid without any sense of incongruity and the player's interest is reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the slider is slid with respect to the guide projection as the guide means, the slider on the driven gear side where the driving force from the drive motor is not applied by the sliding resistance when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position. It is possible to make it difficult to lower the (other slider), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the decorative member tilting and reducing the interest.

  In addition, the decorative member is formed in a substantially U-shaped frame shape with a pair of vertical portions and a horizontal portion that connects the tips of the vertical portions, so that the weight can be reduced with respect to the size of the outer shape, The load applied to the drive motor when the decorative member is raised can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the drive motor is consumed at an early stage and the decorative member does not slide. When stopped at the raised position, the other slider can be made difficult to lower, and it can be prevented that the decorative member is tilted and the appearance is deteriorated and the player's interest is lowered.

  In addition, since the decorative member is formed in a substantially U-shape (frame shape), the outer shape can be enlarged while suppressing an increase in weight, and the mechanism for sliding the decorative member becomes relatively small, and the decorative member In addition to increasing the degree of freedom of placement, the large decorative member slides in the vertical direction, which can attract the player's attention strongly, and the fun and fun of the decorative member can be enjoyed to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, an effect display means that is visible from the player side through the opening of the front-view game panel is provided on the rear side of the decoration member and the unit base so that the decoration member can be slid to the front side of the effect display means. Therefore, by sliding the decorative member to the front side of the effect display means, it is possible to make the decorative member stand out from the player and to attract the player's interest strongly to the decorative member. It is possible to entertain the decoration, present an effect in which the decoration member and the effect image are integrated to the player, and suppress the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. Also, for example, when a frame-shaped decorative member is slid to the front side of the effect display means and a specific effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the decoration member on the display screen of the effect display means, Since the frame-shaped decorative member can be illusioned to the player as if it were a display device different from the effect display means, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by the collaboration effect of the decorative member and the effect image. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, a drive motor and the like are disposed outside the space between the pair of sliders, and the drive motor can be moved away from the receiving unit as much as possible. It is possible to avoid the malfunction of the received sensor, the sensor for detecting fraudulent acts at the entrance, etc., and the malfunction will interrupt the game and reduce the interest of the player Can be prevented, and it is possible to entertain the game without any problem and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the unit base that slidably supports the decorative member is arranged immediately after the receiving unit, the decorative member can be raised into the opening of the game panel in a front view. When raised, the decorative member can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening of the game panel, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative member, and at the same time, the receiving unit enters the player's view As a result, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen at the entrance unit, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  It is desirable that the other slider having the rack gear meshing with the driven gear is provided with assist means for assisting the rotation of the driven gear so that it can easily slide in the ascending direction. Since the gear makes it easy to rotate in the direction of raising one slider, the decorative member can be raised smoothly, and the other slider can be made difficult to lower when the decorative member is stopped at the raised position. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

Aspect 17: In any one gaming machine of aspect 9 to aspect 16,
It is a pachinko machine.
Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium that is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. , A game area provided with appropriate entrances for game balls such as passing holes and arrival holes, a rail for guiding the game balls from the launcher to the game area, and entrance of the game balls guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the ball entrance or according to the entrance mode of the game balls to the plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as a “digipachi machine”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (game state detection And a special lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the incoming ball is detected by the incoming ball state detecting means, and a special symbol for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "With a symbol display means" or "Additionally, during special symbol fluctuations, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped in the symbol string, and characters, various articles, etc. Further comprising an effect display means for displaying an appropriate display by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc. " Game ball distribution Therefore, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 that are equipped with lottery means for performing a lottery, and generally called “aletachi machines”. For example, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to the manner in which the game balls enter the ball opening” can be exemplified.

  According to the structure of aspect 17, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

Aspect 18: In any one gaming machine from Aspect 9 to Aspect 16,
It is a pachislot machine.
Here, the pachislot machine inserts a medal as an insertion medium, and rotates a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) after the medal is inserted. Then, the player can perform a game such that the symbol sequence constituted by each reel is variably displayed, and thereafter the variation display of each symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). Is to be done. In other words, it can be understood as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 18, any effect of the above-described means can be achieved in the pachislot machine.

Aspect 19: In any one gaming machine from the aspect 9 to the aspect 16,
It is characterized by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.
Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the nineteenth aspect, in the gaming machine formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operational effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  More specific description will be given below.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the back bottom drive motor 3605 of the back bottom rendering unit 3600 is rotationally driven according to the gaming state that is changed by the game ball being driven into the game area 1100, the pinion gear 3603 is driven. In addition, the movable frame 3607 slides in the vertical direction by the slider 3602 on the left side when viewed from the front via the rack gear 3602a. At the same time, the slider 3602 on the right side when viewed from the front slides in the vertical direction as the movable frame 3607 slides. The driven gear 3608 meshed with the rack gear 3602a is idled, and the movable frame 3607 can be slid up and down without any problem. At this time, since the back drive motor 3605 and the pinion gear 3603 are arranged outside the space between the sliders 3602, the rear end of the attacker unit 2100 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the attacker unit 2100 and the lower back drive motor 3605 from interfering with each other, and the movable frame 3607 that slides up and down in a narrow space between the attacker unit 2100 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided. Since it can be surely arranged and the back lower drive motor 3605 is provided only on the left side of the left and right sides, the mechanism related to the slide can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the movable frame 3607 that slides (lifts and lowers). The degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased. Therefore, a pachinko machine 1 that can be provided with a movable frame 3607 that slides even in a narrow space, and that is capable of suppressing a decrease in interest by making the player entertained by the sliding movable frame 3607 is provided. Can do.

  Further, only the pinion gear 3603 that meshes with the rack gear 3602a of the slider 3602 on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the rack gear 3602a of the slider 3602 on both left and right ends is driven to rotate by the back lower drive motor 3605, and only on the left side on both left and right sides. Since the lower back drive motor 3605 is arranged, at least the right side space related to the slide of the movable frame 3607 can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the movable frame 3607 can be relatively enlarged or The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by placing another large decorative member (here, the back lower right effect unit 3200) on the side and attracting the player's attention.

  Also, the idler driven gear 3608 is engaged with the rack gear 3602a of the right slider 3602, and resistance can be applied to the right slider 3602, so that the movable frame 3607 can be maintained in the raised state. , The right slider 3602 can be prevented from lowering, and the movable frame 3607 can be easily maintained at the raised position, and when the movable frame 3607 is stopped at the raised position, the driven gear 3608 can move the right slider 3602 to the right. The resistance applied to the slider 3602 can suppress the right side of the movable frame 3607 from being lowered and the movable frame 3607 from being inclined, and can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the movable frame 3607. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as a guide means for restricting the slider 3602 from moving in the direction away from the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608 to the unit base 3601 in the lower back effect unit 3600, the slider 3602 is perpendicular to the sliding direction (vertical direction). Since the guide projection 3601b provided on both sides of the axis passing through the rotation axis of the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608 is provided in the direction, the rack gear 3602a of the slider 3602 is meshed with the pinion gear 3603 and the driven gear 3608. Can be prevented, the rack gear 3602, the pinion gear 3603, and the driven gear 3608 can be meshed in good condition, and the movable frame 3607 can be reliably slid, and the plurality of guide protrusions 3601b can be used to slide the slider. 602 can be straight guided in the vertical direction, and the movable frame 3607 is without discomfort slide (lift) of player's interest can be suppressed. Further, since the slider 3602 is slid with respect to the guide projection 3601b as the guide means, when the movable frame 3607 is stopped at the raised position, the driving force from the backside drive motor 3605 is generated by the sliding resistance. It is possible to make it difficult to lower the slider 3602 on the driven gear 3608 side (the right slider 3602) that does not apply, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the tilting of the movable frame 3607 and reducing the interest.

  Further, the movable frame 3607 is formed in a substantially U-shaped frame shape with a pair of vertical portions 3607a and a horizontal portion 3607b connecting the tips of the vertical portions 3607a, and the weight is reduced with respect to the size of the outer shape. Therefore, when the movable frame 3607 is raised, the load applied to the backside drive motor 3605 can be reduced, and a problem occurs that the backside drive motor 3605 is consumed at an early stage and the movable frame 3607 does not slide. When the movable frame 3607 is stopped at the raised position, the slider 3602 on the right side can be made difficult to lower, and the appearance of the movable frame 3607 is inclined to make the player less interesting. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

  Further, a liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visible from the player side through the opening 1215 of the front-view game panel 1200 is provided on the rear side of the movable frame 3607 and the unit base 3601, and the movable frame 3607 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the movable frame 3607 is slid to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can make the movable frame 3607 stand out from the player and attract the player's interest to the movable frame 3607. It is possible to entertain the movement (slide) and decoration of the movable frame 3607, and to present the player with the production that the movable frame 3607 and the production image are integrated, and entertain the player. It can suppress that interest falls. For example, when the movable frame 3607 is slid to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a specific effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the movable frame 3607 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player Since the movable frame 3607 can be illusioned as if it is a display device different from the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player's attention can be strongly attracted by the collaboration effect of the movable frame 3607 and the effect image. , It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, the lower back drive motor 3605 and the like are arranged outside (left outer) between the pair of sliders 3602, and the lower back drive motor 3605 can be moved away from the attacker unit 2100 as much as possible. It is possible to avoid malfunction of the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the magnetic detection sensor 3103, etc. for detecting fraud that are provided in the attacker unit 2100 by the magnetic force from the lower drive motor 3605. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a malfunction and to reduce the player's interest, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating without any problem. it can.

  Further, a unit base 3601 that slidably supports the movable frame 3607 is disposed immediately after the attacker unit 2100, and the movable frame 3607 can be raised into the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) in a front view. Therefore, when the movable frame 3607 is raised according to the gaming state, the movable frame 3607 can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening 1215 of the gaming panel 1200, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the movable frame 3607. At the same time, the attacker unit 2100 enters the player's field of view, making the player think that something good will happen with the attacker unit 2100 and increasing the expectation of the game. To prevent the interest from deteriorating That.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back lower right effect unit formed in a three-dimensional shape with substantially the same length as the side on the right side of the front view in the window portion 2501 formed in a substantially rectangular shape of the center accessory 2500. 3200, a decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250, a stay portion 3250a extending from the base end side of the decoration main body 3250b to the center side of the game area 1100 (window portion 2501), and a base end side of the stay portion 3250a A slide base 3230 that rotatably supports an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a slide base 3230 slidable in substantially the same direction (left-right direction) as a lower side extending in a direction intersecting the right side of the window 2501. A position (first rotation position) where the unit base 3201 to be supported and the decoration main body 3250b are substantially parallel to the right side of the window 2501 intersects the right side. Rotation drive mechanisms such as a lower right rotation drive motor 3232, a drive gear 3233, a transmission gear 3234, and a rotation gear 3251 that are driven to rotate between a position that is substantially parallel to the lower side (second rotation position). And a rail member 3202, a slider 3203, which are slidably driven between a position where the slide base 3230 has moved to the center side of the game area 110 (first slide position) and a position which approaches the right side (second slide position). The slide drive mechanism such as the back lower right slide drive motor 3204, the drive gear 3205, the slide gear 3206, and the rack gear 3231, the decoration main body 3250b, and the slide base 3230 are in the first rotation position and the first slide position (normal position). Rotation drive mechanism and so as to move each to the second rotation position and the second slide position (first appearance position) at the same time The slide drive mechanism can be controlled, and the rotation drive mechanism and the slide drive mechanism can be controlled so that only the slide base 3230 is moved from the second slide position to the first slide position (second appearance position) in that state. Since the decorative main body 3250b is approached along the right side of the window portion 2501 (in a normal position), the decorative main body 3250b is moved through the stay portion 3250a. When rotated in the direction of the two rotation positions, the front end side of the decoration main body 3250b moves around the circumference of a radius of a straight line connecting the rotation center of the stay portion 3250a and the front end of the decoration main body 3250a. The base end side of the decoration main body 3250b moves around the circumference of a straight line having a radius connecting the rotation center of the stay portion 3250a and the base end of the decoration main body 3250b. Accordingly, the distal end side and the proximal end side of the decoration main body 3250b are moved toward the central side of the game area 1100 and relatively away from the right side, while the slide base 3230 is moved from the first slide position to the second slide position. By sliding, the entire decoration body 3250b moves in the direction of the right side from the center side of the game area 1100, so that the movement of the base end side of the decoration body 3250b intersects the right side ( In the direction substantially parallel to the lower side), the base end side of the decoration main body 3250b is always close to the right side, and the movement of the decoration main body 3250b is always close to the right side. It is possible to make the illusion that the heel also rotates around the base end side. In this state, when the slide base 3230 is moved from the second slide position to the first slide position, the entire decoration main body 3250b moves away from the right side in the direction toward the center in the game area 1100 (window 2501). The decorative body 3250b will be positioned at the approximate center in the window 2501. Therefore, since the decoration main body 3250b is in a state of floating in the window portion 2501, the decoration main body 3250b can be made conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a high-impact movable effect is performed. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can prevent the player from getting bored and the interest is reduced due to the high impact moving effect.

  Further, since the decoration main body 3250b of the lower right lower decoration unit 3250 in the lower right lower rendering unit 3200 can be rotated through the stay portion 3250a or slid through the slide base 3230, the peripheral control board 4140 can be used. By appropriately controlling the rotation drive mechanism such as the back lower right rotation drive motor 3232 and the slide drive mechanism such as the back lower right slide drive motor 3204, the movable pattern of the decoration main body 3250b is appropriately combined with the rotation and the slide. Can be made various, and various movable effects can be performed, and it is possible to make the player less tired of the various movable effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the lower right rendering unit 3200, as described above, the decoration main body 3250b is rotated or slid through the stay portion 3250a, and the decoration having the same length as the right side of the window portion 2501 is provided. Since the main body 3250b can be moved, the movable decoration body 3250b can be made as large as possible, and the large decoration body 3250b can move to give a strong impact to the player. The user's interest can be strongly attracted to the decoration main body 3250b, and the play of the decoration main body 3250b can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In detail, a large-sized decorative body (decorative main body) that can be moved in a conventional pachinko machine has only a movement of either rotation or slide, so that a player who is used to a conventional pachinko machine has a large size in the pachinko machine. Even if the decoration main body 3250b is provided, the prejudice that it does not move so as to be enjoyable will be held, and the interest in the decoration main body 3250b will be low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the large decoration main body 3250b rotates and slides and moves in a complicated manner, so that it moves beyond the player's expectation. The player can be greatly surprised, and at the same time, a strong impact can be given, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the decoration main body 3250b, and the interest can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In addition, since the decoration main body 3250b of the back right lower decoration unit 3250 in the back right lower rendering unit 3200 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing the player side from the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the stay portion 3250a. The decoration main body 3250b can appear on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by rotating or sliding the decoration main body 3250b through the display, and the player is surprised by the decoration main body 3250b appearing while blocking the effect image. In addition, the advent of the decoration body 3250b can make the player think that there is something good, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from deteriorating. it can. Further, by causing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display an effect image that matches the movement of the decoration main body 3250b, it is possible to perform a collaboration effect using the movable effect by the decoration main body 3250b and the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, when the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is in the first rotation position, the base end side from which the stay portion 3250a extends is positioned outside (below) the front view window portion 2501. Therefore, when the decoration main body 3250b is in the first rotation position in which the decoration main body 3250b is substantially parallel to the right side of the window portion 2501, the base end side of the decoration main body 3250b is located on the outer side (lower side) than the window portion 2501. The stay portion 3250a extending from the base end side of the decorative main body 3250b is also positioned outside the window portion 2501, so that only the decorative main body 3250b can be seen from the player side at the first rotation position, and the stay portion 3250a. Can be made invisible, and when it is turned to the second turning position, the decoration main body 3250b and the stay portion 3250a can be seen from the player side. Accordingly, when the decoration main body 3250b is rotated via the stay portion 3250a, the stay portion 3250a can be made to appear or concealed. Therefore, the entire back lower right decoration unit 3250 including the decoration main body 3250b and the stay portion 3250a is combined. The appearance of the player can be changed in various ways, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored by performing various movable effects and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 can be expanded and contracted according to the gaming state, and the decoration main body 3250b can be enlarged by extending the decoration main body 3250b. Can be strongly attracted, and the player can enjoy the movement and decoration of the decoration main body 3250b to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, in addition to the above-described rotation and slide movement, the decoration body 3250b can be expanded and contracted according to the gaming state, so that various movements with respect to the decoration body 3250b can be performed by appropriately combining the three movements. It is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player, and it is possible to move the decoration body 3250b with higher impact, making it possible to entertain the player and make it hard to get bored. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Further, the decoration main body 3250b of the back lower right decoration unit 3250 is provided with a main body head decoration member 3267 that rotates around the main body axis in accordance with the gaming state, so the main body head in the decoration main body 3250b in accordance with the gaming state. The decorative member 3267 rotates, so that the appearance of the decoration body 3250b can be greatly changed, and the decoration body 3250b that can attract the player's interest can be obtained. Thus, the movement and decoration of the decoration main body 3250b can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the main body head decoration member 3267 intersects the main body axis extending in the longitudinal direction of the decorative main body 3250b, that is, the rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction in which the decoration main body 3250b rotates through the stay portion 3250a. Since it rotates around the main body axis extending in the direction, various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the above-mentioned rotation and the movement of the slide. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the main body axis of the decoration main body 3250b in the back lower right decoration unit 3250, that is, the rotation axis of the main body head decoration member 3267 is inclined in the front-rear direction, the decoration main body 3250b rotates when viewed from the front. The main body head decoration member 3267 appears to be elliptical, and the rotation of the main body head decoration member 3267 can be easily recognized. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained. Further, the main body axis is inclined in the front-rear direction so that the front end side of the decoration main body 3250b is positioned forward, and the front end of the decoration main body 3250b is not only the front surface but also the front end surface because the front end of the decoration main body 3250b faces the player side. Can also be seen from the player side, so that the three-dimensional effect of the three-dimensional decoration body 3250b can be increased, and the decoration effect of the decoration body 3250b can be enhanced to attract the player's attention. In addition, it is possible to enjoy moving effects such as rotation, slide, rotation and the like of the decoration main body 3250b, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation is received into the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, a predetermined special lottery result And the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the player according to the selected lottery result, and the detection opening 2701a of the front decoration member 2701 in the front effect unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is displayed. When the player detects the player's approach or contact by the object detection sensor 2702, the predetermined detection result indicating the special lottery result drawn by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the table effect unit 2700 is suggested. Production is performed. At this time, when the player is prompted by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to approach or come into contact with the detection opening 2701a of the front decoration member 2701 disposed from the center in the up-down direction in the game area 1100 in the front view, The player's hand (arm), which is disposed immediately below the detection port 2701a and is detected by the object detection sensor 2702 between the function display unit 1180 and the player's eyes, is positioned by the player's hand. Since at least a part of 1180 is covered and the function display unit 1180 that displays the special lottery result is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player's interest is diverted from the function display unit 1180 and the table effect unit 2700 and the liquid crystal display device Can be directed to 1900, and the presentation presented by the table presentation unit 2700 or the like can be surely enjoyed. With wear, can cause enhanced expectation for a particular lottery result suggested by Table direction unit 2700 etc., interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, the front decoration member 2701 is detected by the object detection sensor 2702 for the player. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like prompts the player to perform an operation that approaches or contacts the detection port 2701a of the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good by urging the operation. In addition to being able to entertain the player by actively performing the urged action, the expectation for the special lottery result can be enhanced, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. it can.

  In addition, when the player's finger is detected by the object detection sensor 2702 when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like prompts the user to approach or contact the detection opening 2701a of the front decoration member 2701 in the front effect unit 2700 or the like. Since the opening / closing member 2706 opens and the 7-segment LED 2711b of the center lower right rear decorative board 2711 presents (displays) an effect suggesting the lottery result, the opening / closing member 2706 is opened to indicate the special lottery result. In order to experience the production, it is necessary to cause the player's finger to be detected by the object detection sensor 2702 by performing an operation as prompted by the weather display device 1900 or the like. Prompt actions can be taken, and players are actively engaged in directing the results of special lottery results It is possible to join, to delight player interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the liquid crystal display device 1900 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is used as a guide means that prompts the player to move the finger toward or in contact with the detection opening 2701a of the front decorative member 2701, It is possible to make it easy to understand the action to be performed by the player by guiding the action urged to the player by an image, and to surely perform the action urged by the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be reliably played.

  Further, since a special lottery result is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the special lottery result is started in the function display unit 1180, the player can detect the front decoration member 2701 with the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. When an action to bring a finger close to or contact with the mouth 2701a is prompted, the special lottery result is displayed before the function display unit 1180 becomes difficult to visually recognize the action, and the player receives the special lottery result. Can be prevented, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized by surely diverting the player's interest from the function display unit 1180.

  Further, since the detection opening 2701a (object detection sensor 2702) of the front decoration member 2701 is disposed in the game area 1100 in a front view, the player's line of sight is left in the game area 1100. Thus, when the operation urged by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is performed, the function display unit 1180 can be made difficult to visually recognize, and the player can be prevented from being completely invisible in the game area 1100. That is, it is possible to prevent the inside of the game area 1100 from becoming invisible even if the player performs an operation of approaching or touching a finger when prompted by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls that circulate the game from being anxious to perform the urged action, and to ensure that the player performs a predetermined action to ensure the above-described effects. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which can be performed to.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the game area 1100 is centered on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) that defines the rear end of the game area 1100 into which game balls are to be shot. The sub-decoration part 3110b having a predetermined width arranged between the main decoration parts 3110a and the main decoration parts 3110a of the front decoration member 3110 in the middle box effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 arranged substantially concentrically and radially. In addition, each of the main decorative portion 3110a and the sub decorative portion 3110b can be individually decorated with light emission by the inner box decorative substrate 3140. For example, the main decorative portion 3110a and the sub decorative portion 3110b is caused to emit light at the same time so that the entire rear side of the corresponding game area 1100 is emitted, or the main decoration portion 3110a is turned off. In this state, the secondary decoration portion 3110b emits light so that the rear side of the game area 1100 emits light in a stripe shape or frame shape along the main decoration portion 3110a arranged concentrically and radially. Since the main decoration portion 3110a is turned off and the rear side of the gaming area 1100 can be emitted in a block shape, the light emission decorations of the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and the plurality of sub decoration portions 3110b are appropriately combined. In this way, the light emitting decoration in the game area 1100 can be changed in various ways to present various light emitting effects, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired can be obtained, and a plurality of main decorative parts 3110a and sub decorative parts can be provided. The decoration effect in the game area 1100 can be increased by 3110b, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. .

  In addition, a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a of a front decoration member 3110 formed in a three-dimensional manner are provided on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 1200, and the main decoration is provided even if the LED of the inner box decoration substrate 3140 is not emitting light. Since the inside of the game area 1100 can be decorated by the shape of the part 3110a, it is possible to prevent the game area 1100 from feeling lonely, and for the player who is selecting the pachinko machine 1 to be played. However, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and the like that can be seen through the transparent gaming panel 1200, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and sub-decoration portions 3110b of the front decoration member 3110 are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1200 so as to constitute a background in the game area 1100. Compared with a conventional pachinko machine that has a picture or the like drawn on it, the focus of the player's eyes on the background in the game area 1100 can be increased, reducing the player's eyes from fatigue early. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced due to eye strain or the like, and the background in the game area 1100 becomes far away, which gives the player a feeling of pressure. Can be relaxed, so that a relatively open feeling can be given to the game area 1100, and the player can enjoy the game with an exhilarating feeling. .

  In addition, a front decoration member 3110 formed in a predetermined shape on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 1200 includes a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and a plurality of sub decoration portions 3110b having a predetermined width. Since they are arranged concentrically and radially at the center, it is possible to make the background of the game area 1100 a uniform feeling, and the player pays attention only to the specific main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b. Can be avoided, and the player's attention can be attracted to the entire background in the game area 1100 to entertain the light emitting decoration.

  Further, since the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a of the front decoration member 3110 arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 1200 are arranged concentrically and radially centering on the approximate center of the gaming area 1100, the gaming area By guiding the player's line of sight to the center of the game area 1100 by a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a arranged to extend to the center of 1100, or by arranging the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a concentrically and radially. The pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of opening can be given to give the player a wide impression, and the game performed in the gaming area 1100 can be surely enjoyed, and the player can be enjoyed with the feeling of opening. It can be relaxed and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

  In addition, since the plurality of main decoration portions 3110a of the front decoration member 3110 that can be independently decorated for light emission are arranged concentrically and radially, the main decoration portions 3110a are caused to emit light appropriately, thereby allowing the game area 1100 to emit light appropriately. It is possible to perform a flashing effect such as rotating around through a transparent gaming panel 1200 in the inside, or a flashing effect that moves radially, etc., showing the player a more decorative lighting effect and increasing the player's interest It can be attracted, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, a plurality of main decoration parts 3110a and sub decoration parts 3110b of the front decoration member 3110 are arranged behind the area where the obstacle nail is planted in the game area 1100, and flows down in the game area 1100. Since a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and sub-decoration portions 3110b can be seen through the transparent game panel 1200 on the back side of the game ball, when the player pays attention to the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100, the movement of the game ball At the same time, the decoration of the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b that can be seen on the rear side can be enjoyed, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing. In addition, since a plurality of main decoration portions 3110a and sub-decoration portions 3110b can be seen through the transparent game panel 1200 on the rear side of the game ball, the main decoration portions 3110a and sub-decoration portions 3110b are illuminated and decorated. The game balls flowing down by the light from the decoration part 3110b can be shown in silhouette, or the light from them can be reflected by the game balls to make the game balls sparkle, changing the appearance of the game balls in various ways Thus, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball, and to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball and to suppress the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, the shielding member 3150 in the middle box effect unit 3100 irradiates the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b in the front decoration member 3110 with light from only the LEDs of the corresponding middle box decoration board 3140. Therefore, each main decoration part 3110a and sub-decoration part 3110b can be clearly separated to emit light, and the other main decoration part 3110a and sub-decoration part 3110b emit light, so that the light emission effect is blurred. It can be suppressed from being seen, and it is possible to perform a certain light emission effect along the shape of the main decoration part 3110a and the sub decoration part 3110b. Accordingly, since the light emission decorations in the game area 1100 can be changed variously according to the light emission patterns of the plurality of main decoration parts 3110a and sub decoration parts 3110b, a plurality of main decorations arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1200 are provided. Various light emitting decorations can be presented by the part 3110a and the sub-decoration part 3110b, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the player more entertaining by enhancing the decoration effect in the game area 1100. it can.

  Further, in the middle box effect unit 3100, a shielding member 3150 is arranged between the diffusion member 3130 and the middle box decoration substrate 3140, and at least the diffusion member 3130 and the middle box decoration substrate 3140 are equal to the shielding member 3150. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate light from one LED to the widest possible region of the corresponding diffusion member 3130, and diffuse the light with the diffusion member 3130. The decorative portion 3110a and the auxiliary decorative portion 3110b can be illuminated and decorated as uniformly as possible. In other words, even if the number of LEDs mounted on the inner box decorative board 3140 is reduced, the main decorative portion 3110a and the sub decorative portion 3110b in the front decorative member 3110 can be favorably decorated with light emission. By reducing it as much as possible, it is possible to reduce the control load on the inner box decorative board 3140 and to suppress an increase in power consumption. A gentle pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  In addition, the front surface of the main decoration portion 3110a in the front decoration member 3110 is inclined in the front-rear direction so that the side close to the approximate center of the game area 1100 in the front view is retracted to the rear side. However, since it will incline so that it may move away from a player, so that it goes to the center side of the game area | region 1100, it can make a player have the illusion that the center of the game area | region 1100 is far away, and has a feeling of depth. The game area 1100 can attract the player's attention strongly, and gives a feeling of oppression to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 by making the center side of the game area 1100 feel far away. Can be suppressed, and the player can be relaxed to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first flow path having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the right side with the center accessory 2500 arranged in the game area 1100 into which the game ball is driven as a boundary. (The flow path indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. 110) and the second flow path (the flow path indicated by the dashed line arrow in FIG. 110) provided with a plurality of obstacle nails G wider than the first flow path on the left side. In addition to the formation of an attacker unit 2100, a gate portion 2750, etc. to which a predetermined privilege is given by passing a game ball below the first flow path, the game ball communicates with the lower end of the first flow path. A lower right passage member 2690 for rolling and guiding to the upstream of the gate portion 2750, and a route through the plurality of obstacle nails G and a route through the lower right passage member 2690 with respect to the attacker unit 2100 and the like. Be equipped Therefore, when the game ball is made to enter the first flow path (on the right side of the center accessory 2500) by the player's driving operation, the flow of the game ball is rectified by the tunnel-like lower right passage member 2690. While the game ball can be enjoyed in an orderly manner, it can be enjoyed by jumping with the obstacle nail G when the game ball enters the second flow path (left side of the center object 2500). You can entertain the movement. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game ball driving operation so that it passes through a favorite route according to the player's preference, mood, skill, etc. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, the lower right passage member 2690 is formed in a tunnel shape by being slanted in a straight line so that the upstream side of the attacker unit 2100 and the like is lowered so as to be low, and rectifies while suppressing the behavior when the game ball flows. Since the movement can be slowed at the same time, it is possible to substantially uniform the discharge speed and the discharge direction of the game ball discharged from the lower right passage member 2690 to the attacker unit 2100 side. The movement of the game ball between the member 2690 and the attacker unit 2100 and the like can be stabilized, and the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is also in relation to the second starting port 2102, the grand prize winning port 2103, the gate portion 2750, It is possible to easily obtain a privilege by winning or passing with high probability. Therefore, if the lower right passage member 2690 is guided with the game ball, the possibility that the game ball will win increases, so that the game ball is guided to the player by the lower right passage member 2690 in the game area 1100. The game ball can be driven at a predetermined position (right side of the center object 2500), and the player can enjoy the game by whether or not the game ball is guided by the lower right passage member 2690 as aimed. Even if the game ball is not guided by the lower right passage member 2690, it may be guided to the attacker unit 2100 or the like through the route via the obstacle nail G, so that a privilege can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the game ball aiming at the lower right passage member 2690 does not pass through the lower right passage member 2690, and the player's interest in the game It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, when a game ball is driven into the route via the lower right passage member 2690, the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 wins the second starting port 2102, the big winning port 2103, etc. Since it is highly probable that even a player who is unfamiliar with a beginner's game can easily obtain a privilege, the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed even by a beginner, and conversely, a privilege can be easily obtained. In the case of a player who feels unplugged, he / she enjoys a game that requires the skill of a driving operation by driving a game ball into the route (left side of the center object 2500) via the obstacle nail G. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for players of any skill.

  In addition, since the movement of the game ball can be slowed by the lower right passage member 2690, the game ball guided to the lower right passage member 2690 can be surely visually recognized and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed, By following the game ball guided by the lower right passage member 2690, the player's line of sight can be naturally directed to the attacker unit 2100, etc. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the same attacker unit 2100 and the like are provided with a route via a plurality of obstacle nails G and a route via a lower right passage member 2690, a player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines With the pachinko machine 1 that can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 that can perform various driving operations in order to obtain a privilege, and that can enjoy the game ball driving operation as an original game of the pachinko machine 1 It becomes possible to make it think that there is, and it can be made easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, the lower right passage member 2690 is formed transparent, so that the game ball being guided to roll is visible from the player side, and the game ball guided by the lower right passage member 2690 is not visible. Since the game ball is not visible, the player is distrusted that the player may be disadvantaged while the game ball is not visible. Can be avoided, and the interest of the player can be prevented from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2711a arranged on the rear side of the lower right passage member 2690 are caused to emit light according to the gaming state, the lower right passage member 2690 for guiding the game ball can be made conspicuous, and the game The player can be prompted to drive the game ball aiming at the lower right passage member 2690, and the game ball guided in the lower right passage member 2690 by the light from the LED 2711a of the center lower right rear decoration board 2711 It becomes possible to make it look like a silhouette, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball guided by the lower right passage member 2690 so that it is hard to get tired, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the first flow path leading to the lower right passage member 2690 is formed on the right side toward which the game ball to be driven into the game area 1100 is directed, when the game ball is strongly driven into the game area 1100 more than a predetermined amount The game ball enters the right side of the center accessory 2500 along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and it is possible to facilitate the game ball driving operation for driving into the lower right passage member 2690. Even an unfamiliar player can easily obtain a privilege, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced. On the other hand, the game ball can be struck with such a strength that it does not enter the lower right passage member 2690 and the game ball can enter the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can hit the game ball with various strengths, and can entertain the game ball driving operation and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with at least a first start port 2101 for drawing a predetermined special lottery result and a grand prize winning port 2103 that opens and closes according to the special lottery result. If a predetermined special lottery result is drawn by accepting the start opening 2101, the prize winning opening 2103 opens and closes and a chance to obtain more benefits comes. Therefore, the attacker unit 2100 is provided to the player. It is possible to motivate a game ball driving operation aiming at the first starting port 2101 or the big winning port 2103 or the like. As described above, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a route via the plurality of obstacle nails G and a route via the lower right passage member 2690. The game ball can be driven through a favorite route according to the person's skill, mood, etc., and it becomes possible to prevent the game ball from being driven and moved monotonously. It can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced.

  Although various aspects extracted from the present embodiment have been described above, those aspects or some configurations of the aspects may be combined with other aspects described in this specification. Moreover, you may apply the structure of a part of the extracted aspect or aspect to another various aspect and effect example (or the aspect extracted from a viewpoint of implement | achieving various effect examples).

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a pachislot machine are integrated. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1200 Game panel 1210 Panel board 1215 Opening part 1220 Panel holder 1900 Liquid crystal display device (production display means)
2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit (receiving port unit)
2101 First start port (receiving port)
2102 Second start port (reception port)
2103 Grand Prize Entrance (Reception)
2127 Second start port sensor 2128 Count sensor 3000 Back unit 3010 Middle box 3020 Back box 3103 Magnetic sensor 3600 Back bottom rendering unit 3601 Unit base 3601a Guide protrusion 3602 Slider 3602a Rack gear 3602b Support pin 3603 Pinion gear 3604 Drive gear 3605 Back Lower drive motor (drive motor)
3607 Movable frame (decorative member)
3607a Vertical portion 3607b Horizontal portion 3608 Driven gear 3616 Roller bush

Claims (1)

Storage means capable of storing a plurality of game balls ;
A ball feeding means for sending the game ball stored in the storage means to the launch position via the passage port;
Launching means capable of firing game balls sent to the launch position by the ball feeding means one by one toward the game area;
A gaming machine comprising a tamper-proof member provided in the ball feeding means ,
The fraud prevention member is made of a bent metal plate material, and a gap is formed between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion formed by bending the metal plate material so that the wire provided on the game ball can enter. It has been
The first plate surface portion in the metal plate material is a surface portion bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and the metal plate material is attached to the ball feeding means at a portion other than the first plate surface portion in the metal plate material. Made,
The ball feeding means is formed with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the metal plate material ,
The passing port is formed with a ball non-passing portion that is communicated with a ball passing portion through which a game ball passes and through which a wire rod can enter although a game ball does not pass through,
The metal plate is arranged so that the gap is located in the non-passing part of the sphere,
Furthermore, the area of the second plate surface in the metal plate material, a game machine, wherein not greater than the area of the first plate surface.